Epson All in One Printer DFX 8500 User Manual

EPSON  
IMPACT SERIAL DOT MATRIX PRINTER  
DFX-8500  
SERVICE MANUAL  
SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION  
4009310  
PRECAUTIONS  
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1) personal injury and 2)  
damage to equipment.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury.  
Great caution should be exercised in performing procedures preceded by  
WARNING Headings.  
Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.  
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing  
repair/maintenance procedures.  
WARNING  
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM BOTH THE POWER SOURCE AND  
PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR PROCEDURES.  
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH  
BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN  
THEIR LINE OF WORK.  
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL. DO NOT  
CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE  
POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING  
ON POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.  
CAUTION  
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY EPSON CERTIFIED  
REPAIR TECHNICIAN.  
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGE IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE,  
LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A  
PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT  
CONNECT IT TO THE POWER SOURCE.  
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE  
POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS  
AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.  
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE  
STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN  
ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.  
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY  
THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-SOURCE ICs OR OTHER  
NONAPPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY  
APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.  
iii  
PREFACE  
This manual describes functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance, and  
repair of DFX-8500.  
The instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experience repair technician,  
and attention should be given to die precautions on the preceding page. The Chapters are  
organized as follows:  
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
Provides a general product overview, lists specifications, and illustrates the main components of the  
printer.  
CHAPTER 2. OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
Describes the theory of printer operation.  
CHAPTER 3. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
Includes a step-by-step guide for product disassembly and assembly.  
CHAPTER 4. ADJUSTMENT  
Includes a step-by-step guide for adjustment.  
CHAPTER 5. TROUBLESHOOTING  
Provides EPSON-approved techniques for troubleshooting.  
CHAPTER 6. MAINTENANCE  
Describes preventive maintenance techniques and lists lubricants and adhesives required to  
service the equipment.  
APPENDIX  
Describes connector pin assignments, circuit diagrams, circuit board component layout and  
exploded diagram.  
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.  
iv  
REVISION SHEET  
Revision  
Rev. A  
Rev. B  
Issued Data  
Contents  
May 18, 1998/  
June 25, 1998  
First issue  
Second issue due to minor correction on the  
manual contents.  
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
CHAPTER 1.  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
ADJUSTMENT  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
MAINTENANCE  
CHAPTER 2.  
CHAPTER 3.  
CHAPTER 4.  
CHAPTER 5.  
CHAPTER 6.  
APPENDIX  
vi  
CHAPTER 1  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.1 FEATURES.............................................................................................................1-1  
1.2 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................1-3  
1.2.1 Printing Specification............................................................................................................. 1-3  
1.2.2 Paper Feeding......................................................................................................................... 1-6  
1.2.3 Electrical Specification .......................................................................................................... 1-6  
1.2.4 Environmental Condition....................................................................................................... 1-6  
1.2.5 Reliability................................................................................................................................. 1-6  
1.2.6 Safety Approvals .................................................................................................................... 1-7  
1.2.7 CE Marking.............................................................................................................................. 1-7  
1.2.8 Acoustic Noise........................................................................................................................ 1-7  
1.2.9 Ribbon Cartridge .................................................................................................................... 1-7  
1.2.10 Physical Specifications........................................................................................................ 1-7  
1.2.11 Printable area ........................................................................................................................ 1-8  
1.2.12 Paper and Media................................................................................................................. 1-12  
1.2.12.1 Continuous paper (Single sheet and multi-part).................................................... 1-12  
1.2.12.2 Labels.................................................................................................................... 1-14  
1.2.12.3 Continuous Forms with Labels.............................................................................. 1-14  
1.2.12.4 Overlapping Multi-part Form.................................................................................. 1-16  
1.2.12.5 Perforation............................................................................................................. 1-16  
1.2.12.6 Notes..................................................................................................................... 1-16  
1.3 INTERFACES.......................................................................................................1-19  
1.3.1 Parallel Interface (Forward channel)................................................................................... 1-19  
1.3.2 Parallel Interface (Reverse channel)................................................................................... 1-21  
1.3.3 Serial Interface...................................................................................................................... 1-22  
1.3.4 Optional Interface................................................................................................................. 1-22  
1.3.5 Interface Selection................................................................................................................ 1-23  
1.3.6 Prevention Hosts from Data Transfer Time-out................................................................. 1-23  
1.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.............................................................................1-24  
1.4.1 Control Panel ........................................................................................................................ 1-24  
1.4.1.1 Switches .................................................................................................................. 1-25  
1.4.1.2 Indicators................................................................................................................. 1-26  
1.4.2 Errors and Buzzers............................................................................................................... 1-27  
1.4.3 DIP Switch Settings.............................................................................................................. 1-28  
1.4.4 Functions .............................................................................................................................. 1-31  
1.4.4.1 Usual operation ....................................................................................................... 1-31  
1.4.4.2 Operation at Power On............................................................................................ 1-33  
1.4.4.3 Built-in Detection ..................................................................................................... 1-34  
1.4.5 Paper Memory Function....................................................................................................... 1-35  
1.4.6 Initializations......................................................................................................................... 1-36  
1.4.6.1 Power-on Initialization ............................................................................................. 1-36  
1.4.6.2 Software Initialization............................................................................................... 1-36  
1.4.6.3 Panel Initialization.................................................................................................... 1-36  
1.5 MAIN COMPONENT ...........................................................................................1-37  
1.5.1 M-3I60 Printer Mechanism ................................................................................................... 1-38  
1.5.2 Main Control Board (C204 MAIN Board)............................................................................. 1-39  
1.5.3 C204 DRV Board ................................................................................................................... 1-40  
1.5.4 C204 DRV-B Board................................................................................................................1-41  
1.5.5 C204 SUB Board....................................................................................................................1-41  
1.5.6 C204 PSB/PSE Board............................................................................................................1-42  
1.5.7 Control Panel.........................................................................................................................1-43  
1.5.8 Housing..................................................................................................................................1-43  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.1 FEATURES  
The DFX-8500 is a 18-pin, serial, dot matrix printer with a maximum speed of 1120 characters per second  
(cps). It is designed for business use and provides high-speed, high-volume printing and continuous-sheet  
handling. The main features of the printer are:  
‰ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
Maximum printing speeds:  
1120 cps (high-speed draft mode)  
840 cps (draft mode)  
210 cps (NLQ mode) at 10 cpi  
Advanced paper handling:  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
10 inches per second (ips) paper feeding  
Paper jam detection  
Paper width detection  
Front and rear two-way push tractors  
Optional pull tractor  
Automatic paper back-out and loading from another paper path and paper park  
Automatic platen gap adjustment for paper thickness  
Automatic tear off  
Paper memory function  
Automatic paper path changing  
Auto cut mode enables the optional perforation cutter to cut the paper at the perforation.  
Bi-directional parallel interface (IEEE-1284 nibble) and RS-232C serial interface standard  
EPSON ESC/P (upper compatible with DFX-8000) and IBM/LEXMARK 2381Plus emulation  
35 character tables in the NLSP (National Language Support) version and 11 character tables in  
the standard version  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
2 NLQ and 1 draft bit-map type faces and 8 barcode fonts are supported.  
Optional paper cutter and perforation cutter  
Upgraded data handling  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
128 KB input buffer  
Automatic interface selection  
Type-B optional I/F cards  
The figure below shows the DFX-8500.  
Figure 1-1. DFX-8500 Exterior View  
1-1  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
The following table shows options.  
Table 1-1. Option  
Name  
Code  
#8766  
Ribbon cartridge  
#8767  
Ribbon pack  
#8309  
Pull tractor unit  
C81500X  
C81507X  
C82305*  
C82306*  
C82307*  
C82308*  
C82310*  
C82311*  
C82312*  
C82313*  
C82314*  
C82315*  
C82357*  
C82345*  
C82362  
C82364  
Paper cutter  
Perforation cutter  
Serial interface card (inch screw)  
Serial interface card (mm screw)  
32-KB intelligent serial I/F card (inch screw)  
32-KB intelligent serial I/F card (mm screw)  
32-KB intelligent parallel I/F card (inch screw)  
32-KB intelligent parallel I/F card (mm screw)  
Local Talk I/F card  
32KB IEEE-488 I/F card  
Coax I/F card  
Twinax I/F card  
Ethernet I/F card  
IEEE-1284 parallel I/F card  
Ethernet I/F card  
Ethernet I/F card  
1-2  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.2 SPECIFICATIONS  
This section describes the specifications for DFX-8500.  
1.2.1 Printing Specification  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
Print method  
Number of pins  
Print pin arrangement : 9 x 2  
Print pin diameter  
Color  
:
:
Impact dot matrix  
18-pin (Refer to Figure 1-2.)  
:
:
:
0.0114 inches (0.29 mm)  
Black  
Bi-directional with logic seeking  
‰ꢀ Print direction  
‰ꢀ  
Print speed and printable columns:  
Refer to Table 1-2.  
0.35 mm (1/72")  
2.82 mm (8/72")  
1.69 mm (1/15")  
Figure 1-2. Printhead Pin Configuration  
Table 1-2. Print Speed and Printable Columns  
Print Mode  
Character Pitch  
Printable Columns  
Print Speed (cps)  
Normal  
High Duty  
1066  
800  
High speed draft  
Draft  
10 cpi  
10 cpi  
12 cpi  
15 cpi  
17 cpi  
20 cpi  
10 cpi  
10 cpi  
12 cpi  
15 cpi  
17 cpi  
20 cpi  
136  
136  
163  
204  
233  
272  
136  
136  
163  
204  
233  
272  
1120  
840  
1008  
630  
720  
840  
420  
210  
252  
200  
171  
200  
960  
630  
685  
800  
400  
200  
240  
200  
Draft condensed  
Draft emphasized  
NLQ  
NLQ condensed  
171  
200  
Notes 1: The line including graphic B0h - FFh or download characters or bit image data will be  
printed by “High duty" mode.  
Notes 2: The line including special high duty download characters or bit image data will be  
printed by one third speed of “High duty” mode.  
Notes 3: When the print head temperature rises to the upper limit, the printer stops printing. And  
when the print head temperature falls to the normal level, then the printer starts  
printing again.  
1-3  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
‰ꢀ  
Resolution:  
Refer to Table 1-3.  
Table 1-3. Resolution  
Print Mode  
High speed draft  
Draft  
Horizontal Density  
Vertical Density  
72 dpi  
Adjacent Dot Print  
90 dpi  
120 dpi  
No  
No  
72 dpi  
Draft condensed  
Draft emphasized  
NLQ  
240 dpi  
120 dpi  
240 dpi  
72 dpi  
72 dpi  
144 dpi  
72 dpi  
No  
Yes  
No  
60, 72, 80, 90, 120 or 144  
dpi  
Yes  
Bit image  
120 or 240 dpi  
72 dpi  
No  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
Control code:  
Character tables:  
ESC/P and IBM 2381 Plus emulation  
Standard version (11 character tables):  
Italic table  
PC437 (US, Standard Europe)  
PC850 (Multilingual)  
PC861 (Icelandic)  
PC865 (Nordic)  
BRASCII  
PC860 (Portuguese)  
PC863 (Canadian-French)  
Abicomp  
Roman 8  
ISO Latin 1  
„ꢀ  
NLSP version (35 character tables):  
Italic table  
PC437 (US, Standard Europe)  
PC437 Greek  
PC850 (Multilingual)  
PC852 (East Europe)  
PC855 (Cyrillic)  
PC866 (Russian)  
MAZOIWA (Poland)  
ISO 8859-7 (Latin / Greek)  
Bulgaria (Bulgarian)  
PC 774 (LST 1283:1993)  
PC 866 LAT. (Latvian)  
PC 860  
PC853 (Turkish)  
PC857 (Turkish )  
PC869 (Greek)  
Code MJK (CSFR)  
ISO Latin 1T (Turkish)  
Estonia (Estonia)  
ISO 8859-2 (ISO Latin 2)  
PC866 UKR  
PC 861  
PC 865  
PC APTEC  
PC 708  
PC 720  
PC AR864  
Abicomp*  
PC 863(Canadian French) *  
BRASCII*  
Roman 8*  
ISO Latin 1*  
Hebrew 7*  
Hebrew 8*  
PC862*  
Note: These tables can not be selected by DIP switch.  
„ꢀ  
International character sets : 13 countries  
USA  
U.K  
Italy  
France  
Denmark 1  
Spain 1  
Germany  
Sweden  
Japan  
Norway  
Latin America  
Denmark 2  
Spain 2  
Note : The international and legal characters are these 12 codes;  
23h, 24h, 40h, 5Bh, 5Ch, 5Dh, 5Eh, 60h, 7Bh, 7Ch, 7Dh, 7Eh.  
‰ꢀ  
Typeface:  
Bit map font:  
„ꢀ  
EPSON Draft  
10 CPI, 12 CPI, 15 CPI  
EPSON Roman  
EPSON Sans Serif  
10 CPI. 12 CPI, 15 CPI, Proportional  
10 CPI, 12 CPI, 15 CPI, Proportional  
„ꢀ  
Bar code:  
EAN-13  
EAN-8  
Interleaved 2 of 5  
UPC-E  
Code 128  
UPC-A  
Code 39  
POSTNET  
1-4  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
‰ꢀ  
Character tables and type faces:  
Refer to Table 1-4.  
Table 1-4. Character tables and type faces  
Character Table  
Bitmap Font  
EPSON Draft  
Standard version  
Italic Table  
PC437 (US, Standard Europe)  
PC850 (Multilingual)  
PC860 (Portuguese)  
PC861 (Icelandic)  
PC863 (Canadian French)  
PC865 (Nordic)  
Abicomp  
EPSON Roman  
EPSON Sans Serif  
BRASCII  
Roman 8  
ISO Latin 1  
Italic table  
NLSP version  
Italic Table  
EPSON Draft  
PC437 (US, Standard Europe)  
EPSON Roman  
EPSON Sans Serif  
PC850 (Multilingual)  
PC852 (East Europe)  
PC855 (Cyrillic)  
PC437 Greek  
PC853 (Turkish)  
PC857 (Turkish)  
PC869 (Greek)  
Code MJK (CSFR)  
PC866 (Russian)  
MAZOWIA (Poland)  
ISO 8859-7 (Latin / Greek) ISO Latin 1T (Turkish)  
Bulgaria (Bulgarian)  
PC 774(LST 1283:1993)  
PC 866 LAT.( Latvian)  
PC 860  
Estonia (Estonia)  
ISO 8859-2 (ISO Latin 2)  
PC 866 UKR  
PC 861  
PC 865  
PC 708  
PC APTEC  
PC 720  
PC AR864  
PC 863*1  
Abicomp*1  
BRASCII*1  
Roman 8*1  
ISO Latin 1  
Hebrew 7*1  
Hebrew 8*1  
PC 862*1  
*1) These tables can not be selected by DIP switches.  
Note : ESC R command is effective on all the character tables.  
Input data buffer:  
0K byte or 128 K bytes (depend on DIP switch settings)  
1-5  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.2.2 Paper Feeding  
‰ꢀ  
Feeding method:  
Push tractor feed (front / rear)  
Push and pull tractor feed (front / rear)  
Front push tractor, rear push tractor, pull tractor (option)  
Paper insertion side alignment :  
Left  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
Feeder:  
‰ꢀ  
Paper path:  
Tractor (front in, rear in, top out)  
‰ꢀ Line spacing:  
‰ꢀ Feed speed:  
1 / 6 inches or programmable in increments of 1 / 216 inches.  
„ꢀ  
1/ 6-inch feed:  
26.5 ms  
„ꢀ  
Continuous feed: 0.251 mps (m/s).  
9.9 ips (inch/sec)  
Note : The feeding speed will be reduced to 0.152 mps (6.0 ips) when the pull tractor is mounted.  
1.2.3 Electrical Specification  
‰ꢀ  
120 V version:  
Rated voltage :  
Input voltage range :  
„ꢀ  
120 V AC  
99 to 132 V AC  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
Rated frequency range : 50 to 60 Hz  
Input frequency range :  
Rated current :  
49.5 to 60.5 Hz  
3.5 A (max.7.5 A)  
Approx.160 W (ISO/IEC10561 Letter pattern)  
Energy Star compliant  
Power consumption :  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
Insulation resistance :  
Dielectric strength :  
10 M ohms min. (between AC line and chassis, 500 V DC)  
1000 AC Vrms. 1 min. or  
1200 AC Vrms. 1 sec. (between AC line and chassis)  
‰ꢀ  
220 - 240 V version:  
Rated voltage :  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
220 to 240 V AC  
198 to 264 V AC  
Input voltage range :  
Rated frequency range : 50 to 60 Hz  
Input frequency range :  
Rated current :  
Power consumption :  
49.5 to 60.5 Hz  
1.4 A (max.3.5 A)  
Approx.160 W (ISO/IEC10561 Letter pattern)  
Energy Star compliant  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
Insulation resistance :  
Dielectric strength :  
10 M ohms min. (between AC line and chassis, 500 V DC)  
1500 AC Vrms. 1 min. (between AC line and chassis)  
1.2.4 Environmental Condition  
‰ꢀ  
Temperature :  
5 to 35 oC (operating)  
-30 to 60 oC (non-operating)  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
Humidity :  
10 to 80 % RH (operating) *1)  
5 to 85 % RH (non-operating) *1)  
1 G, within 1 ms (operating)  
2 G, within 2 ms (non-operating) *2)  
0.25 G, 10 to 55 Hz (operating)  
0.50 G, 10 to 55 Hz (non-operating) *2)  
Resistance to shock :  
Resistance to vibration :  
*1: Without condensation  
*2: With shipment container  
1.2.5 Reliability  
‰ꢀ  
Total print volume :  
26 million lines (except print head)  
10,000 POH (25 % duty)  
‰ꢀ MTBF :  
‰ꢀ Print head life :  
‰ꢀ Ribbon life :  
400 million characters at 14 dots/character  
15 characters at 14 dots /character  
1-6  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.2.6 Safety Approvals  
‰ꢀ  
120 V version:  
Safety standards :  
„ꢀ  
UL1950 with D3  
CSA C22.2 No.950 with D3  
FCC part 15 subpart B class B  
CSA C108.8 class B  
„ꢀ  
EMI :  
‰ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
230 V version:  
Safety standards :  
EMI :  
EN60950 (VDE, NEMKO)  
EN55022 (CISPR pub.22) class B  
AS / NZS 3548 class B  
1.2.7 CE Marking  
‰ꢀ  
230 V version:  
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC : EN60950  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC :  
EN55022 class B  
EN61000-3-2  
EN61000-3-3  
EN50082-1  
IEC801-2  
IEC801-3  
IEC801-4  
1.2.8 Acoustic Noise  
‰ꢀ  
Level:  
58 dB(A) (ISO 7779 pattern)  
1.2.9 Ribbon Cartridge  
‰ꢀ  
Type :  
Fabric  
Black  
‰ꢀ Color :  
‰ꢀ Ribbon life :  
‰ꢀ Dimensions :  
15 million characters (draft 10 cpi, 14 dots / character)  
506.0 mm (W) x 123.5 mm (D) x 23.0 mm (H)  
1.2.10 Physical Specifications  
‰ꢀ  
Dimensions :  
700 mm (W) x 382 mm (D) x 369 mm (H)  
APPROX. 29 Kg  
‰ꢀ Weight :  
1-7  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.2.11 Printable area  
‰ꢀ  
Continuous paper :  
Refer to Figure 1-3.  
L
M
R
M
P
W
T
M
A
B
C
D
W
X
Y
Z
P
L
A
B
C
D
W
X
Y
Z
B
M
A
B
C
D
W
X
Y
Z
.
Continuous Paper  
PW (width)  
PL (length)  
LM (left margin)  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.  
13 mm to 31mm  
RM (right margin)  
TM (top margin)  
13 mm or more  
2.6 mm or more  
BM (bottom margin)  
4.2 mm or more  
Notes 1: In the top 75 mm area, the paper feeding pitch may be irregular.  
Notes 2: If the optional pull tractor is used, the top 120 mm area should not be printed.  
Notes 3: Forms-override printing is available 20 lines after the paper end.  
(Paper feeding pitch is not guaranteed.)  
The end of the printable area is 9 to 15 mm apart from the bottom edge of the paper.  
Figure 1-3. Continuous Paper Printable Area  
1-8  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
‰ꢀ  
Labels :  
Refer to Figure 1-4.  
R
M
L
M
P
W
T
M
L
a
b
e
l
L
a
b
e
l
P
L
L
a
b
e
l
L
a
b
e
l
B
M
.
Continuous Paper  
PW (width)  
PL (length)  
LM (left margin)  
RM (right margin)  
TM (top margin)  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.  
13 mm to 31mm  
13 mm or more  
2.6 mm or more  
BM (bottom margin)  
4.2 mm or more  
Notes 1: Feeding backward or paper (PATH) selection are prohibited.  
Notes 2: If In the top 75 mm area, the paper feeding pitch may be irregular.  
Notes 3: If the optional pull tractor is used, the top 120 mm area should not be printed..  
Notes 4: Forms-override printing is available 20 lines after the paper end.  
(Paper feeding pitch is not guaranteed.)  
The end of the printable area is 9 to 15 mm apart from the bottom edge of the paper.  
Figure 1-4. Label Printable Area  
1-9  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
‰ꢀ  
Continuous forms with labels :  
Refer to Figure 1-5.  
L
M
R
M
P
W
T
M
T
B
F
L
L
L
a
a
b
b
e
l
e
l
F
L
P
L
L
F
L
R
F
L
N
o
n
P
r
i
n
t
a
b
l
e
A
r
e
a
B
M
A
B
C
D
W
X
Y
Z
T
B
O
L
P
r
i
n
t
a
b
l
e
A
r
e
a
O
L
L
O
L
L
a
b
e
l
R
O
L
Continuous Paper  
PW (width)  
PL (length)  
LM (left margin)  
RM (right margin)  
TM (top margin)  
BM (bottom margin)  
LFL (left margin from label)  
RFL (right margin from label)  
TFL (top margin from label)  
BFL (bottom margin from label)  
LOL (left margin on label)  
ROL (right margin on label)  
TOL (top margin on label)  
BOL (bottom margin on label)  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.  
13 mm to 31mm  
13 mm or more  
2.6 mm or more  
4.2 mm or more  
65 mm or more  
65 mm or more  
12.5 mm or more  
12.5 mm or more  
5 mm or more  
5 mm or more  
2 mm or more  
2 mm or more  
Notes 1: Feeding backward or paper (PATH) selection are prohibited.  
Notes 2: If In the top 75 mm area, the paper feeding pitch may be irregular.  
Notes 3: If the optional pull tractor is used, the top 120 mm area should not be printed..  
Notes 4: Forms-override printing is available 20 lines after the paper end.  
(Paper feeding pitch is not guaranteed.)  
The end of the printable area is 9 to 15 mm apart from the bottom edge of the paper.  
Figure 1-5. Continuous Forms with Labels Printable Area  
1-10  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
‰ꢀ  
Overlapping multi-part forms :  
Refer to Figure 1-6.  
L
M
R
M
P
W
P
e
r
f
o
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
C
a
r
r
i
e
r
P
L
B
M
N
A
O
L
T
M
Continuous Paper  
PW (width)  
PL (length)  
LM (left margin)  
RM (right margin)  
TM (top margin)  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.  
19 mm to 31mm  
19 mm or more  
21.2 mm or more  
4.2 mm or more  
BM (bottom margin)  
OL (overlapping length)  
NA (non printable area)  
Less than 13.3 mm  
25.4 mm or more  
Notes 1: Feeding backward or paper (PATH) selection are prohibited.  
Notes 2: If In the top 75 mm area, the paper feeding pitch may be irregular.  
Notes 3: If the optional pull tractor is used, the top 120 mm area should not be printed..  
Notes 4: Forms-override printing is available 20 lines after the paper end.  
(Paper feeding pitch is not guaranteed.)  
The end of the printable area is 9 to 15 mm apart from the bottom edge of the paper.  
Figure 1-6. Overlapping Multi-part Form Printable Area  
1-11  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.2.12 Paper and Media  
1.2.12.1 Continuous paper (Single sheet and multi-part)  
Table 1-5. Continuous Paper  
Front Entry  
Rear Entry  
Maximum  
Minimum  
4.0  
Maximum  
16.0  
Minimum  
4.0  
Width  
(inch)  
(mm)  
(inch)  
(mm)  
16.0  
406  
17.0  
431  
101  
406  
101  
4.0  
101  
Length  
4.0  
17.0  
101  
431  
Copies  
1 original + 6 copies  
1 original + 5 copies  
Total Thickness  
(inch)  
(mm)  
(g/m2)  
(lb)  
0.0025  
0.065  
52.6  
14  
41.4  
11  
0.021  
0.53  
82.7  
22  
56.4  
15  
0.0025  
0.065  
52.6  
14  
41.4  
11  
0.018  
0.46  
82.7  
22  
56.4  
15  
Weight  
(not multi-part)  
Weight  
(one sheet of multi-part)  
Quality  
(g/m2)  
(lb)  
Plain paper, Reclaimed paper, Carbonless multi-part forms  
Multi-part binding  
Rough bindings of multi-part paper cause paper jam.  
The each sheet of multi-part paper should normally be put together by  
spot-gluing, paper-stapling, tape stitching. Spot-gluing is recommended  
for the better printing quality.  
Spot-gluing must be applied on both sides of paper (Refer to Figure 1-  
7.).  
The spot-glued parts must be pressed flat. There must be no creases in  
the paper.  
The paper-stapling must be applied from the front of paper and the  
paper must be flat (Refer to Figure 1-8.).  
Paper-stapling must be applied for both feeding directions (Refer to  
Figure 1-9.).  
The paper-stapling should be flat (Refer to Figure 1-10.).  
Never use metal staples.  
The position of binding must be outside of printable area.  
Multi-part paper should be bound firmly to each other and the binding  
must not be too large.  
Perforation  
Notes  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.5.  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.6.  
Figure 1-7. Dotted Paste Positions  
1-12  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
Figure 1-8. Paper-stapling Height  
Figure 1-9. Paper-stapling Method 1  
Figure 1-10. Paper -stapling Method 2  
1-13  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.2.12.2 Labels  
Table 1-6. Labels  
Front Entry  
Rear Entry  
Minimum Maximum  
Minimum  
Maximum  
Label Size  
Refer to Figure 1-11.  
-
Backing Sheet Width  
(inch)  
(mm)  
(inch)  
(mm)  
(inch)  
(mm)  
(inch)  
(mm)  
4.0  
101  
3.5  
89  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0025  
0.065  
16.0  
406  
17.0  
431  
0.0047  
0.12  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Backing Sheet Length  
Label Thickness  
Total Thickness  
Quality  
0.0075  
0.19  
AVERY CONTINUOUS FORM LABELS,  
AVERY MINI-LINE LABELS, or the  
same quality labels  
-
Perforation  
Notes  
Refer to section 1.2.12.5.  
The easy-cone-off label should not be used.  
Every label must be put on the carrier.  
Each comer of those labels must be rounded.  
Each label and backing sheet should not have any folds or creases.  
Between each label, there should be the same sheet as those labels.  
The backing sheet must be continuous paper.  
Labels should be inserted from front entrance.  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.6.  
W
H
Width  
Height  
Inch  
2.5  
4.0  
mm  
63.5  
101  
101  
Inch  
15/16  
15/16  
17/16  
mm  
23.8  
23.8  
27.0  
4.0  
Figure 1-11. Label Size  
1-14  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
Rear Entry  
1.2.12.3 Continuous Forms with Labels  
Table 1-7. Continuous Forms with Labels  
Front Entry  
Minimum  
Maximum  
Minimum  
Maximum  
Label Size  
Width  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.2.  
-
(inch)  
(mm)  
(inch)  
(mm)  
(g/m2)  
(lb)  
4.0  
101  
4.0  
101  
52.6  
14  
41.4  
11  
0.0  
16.0  
406  
17.0  
431  
82.7  
22  
56.4  
15  
0.0047  
0.12  
0.021  
0.53  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Length  
Weight  
(not multi-part)  
Weight  
(one sheet of multi-part)  
Label Thickness  
(g/m2)  
(lb)  
(inch)  
(mm)  
(inch)  
(mm)  
0.0  
0.0025  
0.065  
Total Thickness  
-
-
Quality (Multi-part forms)  
Quality (Label)  
Plain paper, reclaimed paper, carbonless  
multi-part forms  
AVERY CONTINUOUS FORM LABELS,  
AVERY MNI-LINE LABELS, or the same  
quality labels  
Multi-part binding  
Rough bindings of multi-part paper cause paper jam.  
The each sheet of multi-part paper should normally be put  
together by spot-gluing, paper-stapling, tape stitching. Spot-gluing  
is recommended for the better printing quality.  
Spot-gluing must be applied on both sides of paper (Refer to  
Figure 1-7.).  
The spot-glued parts must be pressed flat. There must be no  
creases in the paper.  
The paper-stapling must be applied from the front of paper and the  
paper must be flat (Refer to Figure 1-8.).  
Paper-stapling must be applied for both feeding directions (Refer  
to Figure 1-9.).  
The paper-stapling should be flat (Refer to Figure 1-10.).  
Never use metal staples.  
The position of binding must be outside of printable area.  
Multi-part paper should be bound firmly to each other and the  
binding must not be too large.  
Perforation  
Notes  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.5.  
The easy-cone-off label should not be used.  
Every label must be put on the carrier.  
Each comer of those labels must be rounded.  
Each label and backing sheet should not have any folds or  
creases.  
Between each label, there should be the same sheet as those  
labels.  
The backing sheet must be continuous paper.  
Continuous forms with labels should be inserted from front  
entrance.  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.6.  
1-15  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.2.12.4 Overlapping Multi-part Form  
Table 1-8. Overlapping Multi-part Form  
Front Entry  
Maximum  
Rear Entry  
Maximum  
Minimum  
4.0  
Minimum  
Width  
(inch)  
(mm)  
(inch)  
(mm)  
(g/m2)  
(lb)  
16.0  
406  
17.0  
431  
82.7  
22  
-
-
-
-
-
101  
4.0  
101  
52.6  
14  
Length  
-
-
-
Weight  
(not multi-part)  
Weight  
(g/m2)  
(lb)  
41.4  
11  
56.4  
15  
(one sheet of multi-part)  
Copies  
1 original + 5 copies + 1 backing  
sheet  
-
-
Total Thickness  
(print area)  
Total Thickness  
(overlap area)  
Overlapping Length  
(inch)  
(mm)  
(inch)  
(mm)  
(inch)  
(mm)  
0.0025  
0.065  
0.005  
0.021  
0.53  
0.028  
0.70  
0.39  
10  
-
-
-
-
-
-
0.13  
more than 0  
more than 0  
Quality (multi-part forms)  
Multi-part binding  
Plain paper, reclaimed paper,  
carbonless multi-part forms  
Multi-part paper must be bound at the top side by spot-gluing (Figure 1-  
12.).  
The bindings must not be too hard. And there should not be any spilt  
glue.  
The position of binding must be outside of printable area.  
Multi-part paper should be bound firmly to each other and the binding  
must not be too large.  
Perforation  
Notes  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.5.  
Overlapping multi-part form should be inserted from front entrance.  
Refer to Section 1.2.12.6.  
1.2.12.5 Perforation  
Weak horizontal and vertical perforations cause paper jams.D  
The length ratio of the cut part and uncut part of perforations must be more than 3 to 1 and less than 5  
to 1 (Refer to Figure 1-13.).  
Horizontal perforations must have an uncut part in each end of the paper (Refer to Figure 1-14.).  
At the intersection of horizontal and vertical perforations, the cut part of the perforations must not cross  
each other (Refer to Figure 1-15.).  
The raised part at the perforation must be less than 1 mm when the bottom layer kept by force (Refer  
to Figure 1-16.).  
1.2.12.6 Notes  
Clean paper (with no folds, creases, tears) should be used (Refer to Figure 1-17.).  
The sprocket hole must be circular. The hole may have teeth (Refer to Figure 1-18.).  
The sprocket hole of each layer must not be shifted (Refer to Figure 1-19.).  
The litter of sprocket holes must be removed from the paper.  
Paper should be fan-folded at horizontal perforations. Never use one that is not fan-folded property  
(Refer to Figure 1-20.).  
No hole is acceptable in the printable area.  
Paper must be torn off accurately along perforations.  
1-16  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1
9
o
r
m
o
r
e
1
9
-
3
1
1
3
+
3
1
3
+
3
M
u
l
t
i
-
p
a
r
t
c
u
t
s
h
e
e
t
B
a
s
e
s
h
e
e
t
S
p
o
t
-
g
l
u
e
d
p
a
r
t
P
e
r
f
o
r
a
t
i
o
n
o
f
b
a
s
e
s
h
e
e
t
S
L
p
o
t
-
g
l
u
e
d
p
s
r
t
o
w
e
r
e
d
g
e
P
a
g
e
W
i
d
t
h
S
p
o
t
-
g
l
u
e
d
p
a
r
t
U
n
i
t
:
m
m
Figure 1-12. Paper Width Overlapping Area  
Figure 1-13. Perforations 1  
Figure 1-14. Perforations 2  
1-17  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Figure 1-16. Raised Portion at a Perforation  
a)  
b)  
c)  
Figure 1-15. Perforations 3  
Figure 1-18. Sprocket Hole 1  
Figure 1-19. Sprocket Hole 2  
Figure 1-17. Unsuitable Paper  
Figure 1-20. Bad Folded Paper  
1-18  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.3 INTERFACES  
The DFX-8500 is equipped with parallel interface, serial interface, and optional Type-B interface card.  
This section presents the specifications for each interface type.  
1.3.1 Parallel Interface (Forward channel)  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
Data transmission mode:  
Synchronization:  
Connector type:  
8-bit parallel, IEEE-1284 compatibility mode  
/STROBE pulse  
57-30360 (AMPHENOL) 36-pin plug or equivalent  
BUSY and /ACK handshaking  
Handshaking:  
Notes 1: BUSY signal is set high before setting either /ERROR low or PE high and held high until  
all these signals return to their inactive state. BUSY signal is at a high level in the following  
cases.  
During data entry (see data transmission timing)  
When input data buffer is full.  
During /INIT signal is at a low level or during hardware initialization  
During printer error (see /ERROR signal)  
During test printing or during setting printing  
During SelecType  
When the parallel interface is not selected.  
Notes 2: /ERROR signal is at a low level when the printer is in one of the following states.  
Printer hardware error (fatal error)  
Paper out error  
Paper jam error  
Cover open status  
Incomplete paper change  
Paper size error  
Ribbon jam error  
Notes 3: PE signal is at a high level during paper out error.  
‰ꢀ  
Data transmission timing:  
Refer to Figure 1-21.  
D
A
T
A
(
n
+
1
)
D
A
T
A
(
n
)
D
A
T
A
t
h
o
l
d
S
T
R
O
B
E
t
n
e
x
t
t
s
t
b
t
s
e
t
u
p
B
U
S
Y
t
r
e
a
d
y
t
b
u
s
y
A
C
K
N
L
G
t
r
e
p
l
y
t
a
c
k
t
n
b
u
s
y
Parameter  
t setup  
t hold  
Minimum  
500 ns  
500 ns  
500 ns  
0
Maximum Parameter  
Minimum  
Maximum  
10 us  
---  
---  
120 ns  
200 ns  
---  
---  
---  
500 ns  
t ack  
t nbusy  
t next  
0
0
---  
---  
t stb  
---  
500 ns  
---  
t ready  
t busy  
t reply  
tt-out*  
tt-in**  
---  
---  
Note: * Rise and fall time of output signals  
** Rise and fall time of input signals.  
Figure 1-21. Data Transmission Timing  
1-19  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
‰ꢀ  
Signal Level:  
TTL-level compatible, IEEE-1284 level 1 device  
Refer to Table 1-9.  
Table 1-9. Signal Level  
Parameter  
VOH*  
VOL*  
IOH*  
IOL*  
CO  
Minimum  
-
-0.5 V  
-
-
-
-
Maximum  
5.5 V  
-
0.32 mA  
12 mA  
50 pF  
2.0 V  
Condition  
VOH = 2.4 V  
VOL = 0.4 V  
VIH  
VIL  
0.8 V  
-
IIH  
IIL  
CI  
-
-
-
0.32 mA  
12 mA  
50 pF  
VIH = 2.4 V  
VIL = 0.8 V  
Note: * A low logic level on the logical high signal is 2.0 V or less when the printer is powered off.  
And this signal is equal or exceeding 3. 0 V when the printer is powered on. The receiver  
shall provide an impedance equivalent to 7.5 K ohms to ground.  
Connector pin assignments and signals: Refer to Table 1-10.  
Table 1-10. Signal and Connector Pin Assignment (Forward channel)  
Pin No.  
Signal Name Return GND pin In/Out*  
Functional Description  
1
/STROBE  
19  
In  
The strobe pulse. Read-in of data is performed  
at the falling edge of this pulse.  
2-9  
DATA 0-7  
20-27  
In  
The DATA0 through DATA7 signals represent  
data bits 0 to 7, respectively. Each signal is at  
high level when data is logical 1 and low level  
when data is logical 0.  
10  
11  
/ACKNLG  
BUSY  
28  
29  
Out This signal is a negative pulse indicating that  
the printer can again accept data.  
Out A high signal indicates that the printer cannot  
receive data.  
12  
13  
PE  
SLCT  
28  
28  
Out A high signal indicates paper-out error.  
Out Always at high level when the printer is  
powered on.  
14  
31  
/AFXT  
/INIT  
30  
30  
In  
In  
Not used.  
The falling edge of a negative pulse or a low  
signal on this line causes the printer to initialize.  
Minimum 50 us pulse is necessary.  
32  
36  
18  
/ERROR  
/SLIN  
Logic H  
+5V  
29  
30  
-
Out A low signal indicates printer error condition.  
In Not used.  
Out Pulled up to +5V via 3.9K ohm resistor.  
Out Pulled up to +5V via 3.3K ohm resistor.  
35  
-
17  
Chassis GND  
GND  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Chassis GND.  
Signal GND.  
Not connected.  
16,33,19,30  
15,34  
NC  
Note: * In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer’s point of view.  
1-20  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.3.2 Parallel Interface (Reverse channel)  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
Data transmission mode:  
Connector type:  
Synchronization:  
Handshaking:  
Data transmission timing:  
Signal Level:  
IEEE-1284 nibble mode  
57-30360 (AMPHENOL) 36-pin plug or equivalent  
No Info.  
No info.  
No info.  
TTL-level compatible, IEEE-1284 level 1 device  
The printer responds to the extensibility request in the affirmative,  
when the request is 00h or 04h, which mean:  
00h : Request nibble mode of reverse channel transfer  
04h : Request device ID in nibble mode of reverse channel transfer  
Extensibility request :  
‰ꢀ  
Device ID :  
[00h][3Ah]  
MPG:EPSON;  
CMD:ESCP9,PRPII9,BDC;  
MDL:DFX-8500;  
CLS:PRINTER;  
Connector pin assignments: Refer to Table 1-11.  
Table 1-11. Signal and Connector Pin Assignment (Reverse channel)  
Pin No. Signal Name I/O* Description  
IN HostCIk: This signal is a strobe pulse used to read extension  
1
/STROBE  
DATA 1-8  
request values from the host computer during negotiation.  
The signals are data bits of extension request Values during  
negotiation. This printer supports following values:  
0000 0100: Request Device ID (by nibble mode sending)  
0000 0000: Request nibble mode  
2-9  
IN  
10  
11  
/ACKNLG  
BUSY  
OUT  
OUT  
PtrCIk: Printer data sending clock.  
PtrBusy: Printer sending data bits 3 and 7 during data transfer to  
the host computer  
12  
13  
14  
PE  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
AckDataReq: Printer sending data bits 2 and 6 during data transfer  
to the host computer  
Xflag: Printer sending data bits 2 and 6 during data transfer to the  
host computer.  
HostBusy: This signal informs the printer of the host computer  
state. When the signal is HIGH, the host computer cannot accept  
data.  
SLCT  
/AUTO-FEED  
15  
16  
17  
NC  
GND  
CHASSISGND  
-
-
-
Not used.  
Logic ground level  
Connected to the printer chassis. The printer chassis GND and the  
signal GND are connected to each other.  
Not connected.  
18  
NC  
-
19-30  
31  
GND  
/INIT  
-
IN  
Ground level for the twisted pair return signal.  
nlnit: High level fixed  
32  
/ERROR  
OUT  
nDataAvaiI: Printer sending data bits 0 and 4 during data transfer to  
the host computer.  
33  
34  
35  
36  
GND  
NC  
+5  
-
-
-
IN  
Same as for ins19to30.  
Not used.  
Pulled up to +5V through 1.0K ohm resistor.  
1284Active: If this signal is set to HIGH, this printer active  
P1284(reverse mode).  
/SLCT IN  
Note: * In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer’s point of view.  
1-21  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.3.3 Serial Interface  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
Synchronization :  
Signal level (ELA-232D) :  
MARK (logical 1) :  
SPACE (logical 0) :  
Word length :  
Asynchronous  
-3Vto-25V  
+3Vto+25V  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
Start bit :  
Data bit :  
Parity bit :  
Stop bit :  
1 bit  
8 bit  
Odd, Even, Non, of Ignore  
1 bit or more  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
„ꢀ  
Baud rate :  
2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps  
DTR signal or X-ON / X-OFF  
Indicates that the printer cannot receive data.  
Indicates that the printer is ready to receive data.  
Handshaking :  
DTR=MARK, X-OFF :  
DTR=SPACE, X-ON :  
Note: The DTR signal is MARK and X-OFF code (DC3, 13h) is transmitted when the rest of the  
input buffer becomes 256-byte. The DTR signal is SPACE and X-ON code (DC1, 11h) is  
transmitted when the rest of the input buffer is regained 256-byte.  
‰ꢀ  
Error handling :  
When parity error is detected, the received byte is changed to the  
"*" character code. Overrun error and framing error are ignored.  
25 pin sub-miniature D-shell connector (female)  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
Connector :  
Connector pin assignment and signals : Refer to Table 1-12.  
Table 1-12. Signal and Connector Pin Assignment (EIA-232D)  
Pin No. Signal Name In / Out*  
Functional Description  
2
TXD  
DTR  
REV  
RTS  
Out  
Out  
Out  
Out  
Transmit data.  
20  
11  
4
Indicates that the printer is ready to receive data or not.  
Connected directly to the DTR signal.  
Request to send. always SPACE level when the printer is  
powered on. Pulled up to +12 V via 4.7K-ohm resistor.  
Receive data  
3
7
1
RXD  
In  
-
-
Signal GND  
Chassis  
GND  
Signal GND  
Chassis GND  
Other  
NC  
-
Not used. Not connected.  
Note: * In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer’s point of view.  
1.3.4 Optional Interface  
Type-B and Type-B level 2 optional interfaces are available (Refer to Table 1-1.).  
1-22  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.3.5 Interface Selection  
The printer has three interfaces; the parallel interface, serial interface, and optional Type-B interface.  
These interfaces are selected manually by DIP SW or selected automatically.  
‰ꢀ  
Manual selection:  
One of three interfaces can be selected by DIP SW setting.  
‰ꢀ  
Automatic selection:  
The automatic interface selection is enabled by DIP SW setting. In this automatic interface  
selection mode, the printer is initialized to the idle state scanning which interface receives data  
when it is powered on. Then the interface that receives data first is selected. When the host stops  
data transfer and the printer is in stand-by state for the seconds specified by DIP SW setting, the  
printer is returned to the idle state. As long as the host sends data or the printer interface is busy  
state, the selected interface is let as it is.  
‰ꢀ  
Interface state and interface selection:  
When the parallel interface is not selected, the interface got into a busy state. When the serial  
interface is not selected, the interface sends X-OFF and sets the DTR signal MARK. When the  
optional interface is not selected, the printer sends disable commands to the optional interface.  
When the printer is initialized or returned to the idle state, the parallel interface got into a ready  
state, the serial interface sends X-ON and sets the DTR SPACE and the printer sends enable  
commands to the optional interface.  
Caution that the interrupt signal such as a /INIT signal on the parallel interface is not effective  
while that interface is not selected.  
1.3.6 Prevention Hosts from Data Transfer Time-out  
Generally, hosts abandons data transfer to peripherals when a peripheral is in busy state for dozens of  
seconds continuously. To prevent hosts from this kind of time-out, the printer receives data very slowly,  
several bytes per minute, even if the printer is in busy state. This slowdown is started when the rest of the  
input buffer becomes several hundreds of bytes. At last, when the input buffer is full, the printer is in busy  
state continuously.  
1-23  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
This section describes the functions performed through the control panel, such as test print, hexadecimal  
dump, and paper memory function.  
1.4.1 Control Panel  
The printer control panel gives you easy control over most common printer operations. The panel consists  
of indicator lights and buttons.  
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
P
P
O
o
a
w
p
e
r
T
F
o
o
p
r
o
L
L
f
F
o
/
F
F
M
i
c
r
o
P
a
u
s
e
P
A
P
E
R
S
E
L
E
C
T
F
o
n
t
P
i
t
c
h
C
o
p
y
m
a
d
F
e
e
d
e
r
u
t
S
D
R
S
p
a
e
n
r
s
D
r
a
1
1
1
1
2
P
f
0
2
5
7
0
t
c
c
c
c
c
p
p
p
p
p
i
i
i
i
i
f
o
a
f
t
m
a
n
R
i
b
b
o
n
s
e
r
i
f
S
R
e
s
e
t
T
e
a
r
O
f
f
3
s
e
c
P
a
p
e
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
F
r
o
n
t
/
R
e
a
r
L
E
D
O
f
f
L
E
D
O
n
Figure 1-22. Control Panel  
1-24  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.4.1.1 Switches  
The control panel contains eleven switches.  
Operation in normal mode:  
In normal mode, pressing panel switches executes following function. Refer to Table 1-13.  
Table 1-13. Switch Function in Normal Mode  
Switch  
Function  
Front / Rear  
Pause  
Change the front and rear paper path alternately.  
Alternates printing and no-printing status.  
Enables reset function, holding it down for three seconds.  
Executes micro feed forward.  
Micro Feed ↑  
Micro Feed ↓  
LF / FF Load  
Executes micro feed backward.  
Loads the paper when the paper is empty.  
Executes line feed, pressing it shortly.  
Executes form feed, holding it down for a few seconds.  
Set current point to top of form when the cover opens.  
Enables loading position adjustment and tear off position adjustment  
when the cover opens.  
TOF (top of form)  
Tear Off  
Copy  
Advances continuous paper to the Tear off position adjustment.  
Alternates copy mode or not.  
Pitch  
Selects pitch.  
Font  
Selects font.  
Paper Select  
Selects paper No.  
Operation at power on:  
Tuning the printer on while pressing panel switches executes the function shown in Table 1-14.  
Table 1-14. Switch Function at Power On  
Switch  
Function  
LF / FF Load  
Draft self test  
Tear off  
NLQ self test  
Tear off and LF / FF  
Data dump  
Pause  
DIP SW setting print  
Clear EEPROM at area 2  
Clear EEPROM at area 1  
Clear driving line count for ribbon change timing  
Paper memory  
LF / FF Load and Micro Feed and Pause*1)  
Pause and Front / Rear*2)  
Copy  
Paper Select  
Mechanism adjustment (Refer to Chapter 4.)  
Platen gap adjustment (Refer to Chapter 4.)  
Measurement seeking (Refer to Chapter 4.)  
Tear Off, Micro Feed , and Front/Rear  
Tear Off, Micro Feed , and Front/Rear  
Micro Feed and Micro Feed ↓  
Notes1: All of mechanism adjustment values are cleared. Then it requires the printer mechanism  
adjustment.  
Notes2: All of user setting value is replaced with the factory setting value.  
1-25  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.4.1.2 Indicators  
The control panel contains fifteen LEDs.  
Rear (2) (Green / Red) :  
„ꢀGreen LED on when the rear paper path is selected with paper.  
„ꢀRed LED on when the rear paper path is selected without paper.  
„ꢀOff when the front paper path is selected.  
Front (2) (Green / Red) :  
„ꢀGreen LED on when the front paper path is selected with paper.  
„ꢀRed LED on when the front paper path is selected without paper.  
„ꢀOff when the rear paper path is selected.  
Pause (Orange) :  
„ꢀThe LED on when the printer is paused, and it is off when the printer is not paused.  
„ꢀThe LED blinks when the printer is in the print head hot status.  
Top of Form (Green) :  
„ꢀThe LED on when the top of form position is adjustable and tear off position is adjustable.  
Tear Off (Green) :  
„ꢀThe LED on when the paper is in Tear off position and it is off when the paper is out of the Tear-off  
position.  
Copy (Green) :  
„ꢀThe LED is on at copy mode, and it is off at normal mode.  
Pitch (Green) :  
„ꢀThe status of Pitch selection is displayed by three Pitch LEDs.  
❏ ❏ ■ : 10 cpi  
❏ ■ ❏ : 12 cpi  
❏ ■ ■ : 15 cpi  
■ ❏ ❏ : 17 cpi  
■ ❏ ■ : 20 cpi  
■ ■ ❏ : PS  
(: LED off, : LED on.)  
Font (Green) :  
„ꢀThe status of Font selection is displayed by two Font LEDs.  
❏ ❏ : Super draft  
❏ ■ : Draft  
■ ❏ : Roman  
■ ■ : Sans Serif  
Power (Green) :  
(: LED off, : LED on.)  
„ꢀThe LED is on when the printer is powered on, and it is off when the printer is powered off.  
Paper Out (Red) :  
„ꢀThe LED is on when the printer is in the paper out status, and it is off when the printer is out of this  
status.  
„ꢀThe LED blinks when the printer is in the paper jam status.  
Ribbon (Red) :  
„ꢀThe LED blinks when the printer is in the ribbon jam status.  
Paper Select (Seven-segment, Green) :  
„ꢀThe LED indicates selected paper No.  
1-26  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.4.2 Errors and Buzzers  
Errors fall into 2 types; normal error/warning and fatal error. See the tables below for detailed information.  
Table 1-15. Error/Warning Buzzer Information  
Error/Warning  
PAUSE  
LED  
Off  
Paper Out  
LED  
Off  
Ribbon Beeper *1)  
LED  
Off  
Description  
On Line  
Pause  
On  
Off  
Off  
Head hot  
Head Fan hot  
Paper out error  
Blinking Off  
Blinking Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
ON  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
. . .  
. . .  
. . .  
When the printer fails to load a  
sheet, it goes paper out error.  
When the printer’s cover is  
open, it goes cover open error.  
When the printer fails to change  
the paper, it goes incomplete  
changing paper path error.  
Cover open error  
Incomplete  
changing paper  
Incomplete back-  
feed paper  
Paper size error  
On  
Blinking  
Off  
Off  
Off  
. . .  
. . .  
ON  
When paper width of the setting  
data and the current paper are  
different, it goes Paper size  
error.  
Paper jam error  
Ribbon jam error  
ON  
On  
On  
Blinking  
Off  
Off  
- - - - -  
When the printer fails to eject a  
sheet, it goes paper jam error.  
When the ribbon is in a jam  
status, it goes ribbon jam error.  
When carriage breaking length  
Blinking - - - - -  
Blinking - - - - -  
Measurement  
seeking error  
Blinking  
is  
abnormal,  
it  
goes  
Measurement seeking error.  
Illegal panel  
operation  
-
-
-
-
Note 1: The descriptions “.”and “-“ show how the beeper sounds.  
“.”: Beeper sounds 100 ms and interval is 100 ms.  
“-“ : Beeper sounds 500 ms and interval is 100 ms.  
Table 1-15a. Fatal Error Information  
Fatal Error  
7-segment LED Beeper *2)  
Indication *1)  
Description *3)  
CR motor circuit shortage error  
Cutter error  
Platen gap error  
Carriage lock error  
Carriage load measurement  
error  
1
2
3
4
6
-
- -  
- - -  
- - - -  
- - - - - -  
Auto power off after 12 seconds  
Auto power off after 12 seconds  
Auto power off after 12 seconds  
Auto power off after 12 seconds  
Auto power off after 12 seconds  
Head fan error  
Head circuit shortage error  
RAM check error  
Paper memory setting error  
EEPROM data compare error  
Tractor change error  
Watch dog error  
7
8
9
a
b
c
d
- - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - -  
Head power off immediately  
Head power off immediately  
Auto power off after 12 seconds  
Auto power off after 12 seconds  
Auto power off after 12 seconds  
Note 1: The 7 segment LED indicates error No. and “E” alternately.  
Note 2: The descriptions “.”and “-“ show how the beeper sounds.  
“.”: Beeper sounds 100 ms and interval is 100 ms.  
“-“ : Beeper sounds 500 ms and interval is 100 ms.  
Note 3: Turn the printer power off while the 7 segment LED are on, or the printer shuts power  
down automatically. You can’t turn the printer back on for 5 minutes after the printer shuts  
power down automatically  
1-27  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.4.3 DIP Switch Settings  
There are five DIP switches that are located at the front paper entrance of the printer. These DIP switches  
can set the printer defaults.  
When power is applied or the printer is reset, the DIP switch selections are treated as the default setup. If  
the setup is changed, the power should be cycled or the printer should be reset.  
Table 1-16 shows the DIP switch selections for this printer.  
Table 1-16. DIP Switch Settings  
Switch No.  
1-1 to 1-6  
1-7  
Function  
Off  
On  
Factory Setting  
All Off  
Off  
Character table  
Skip over perforation  
Print direction  
Refer to Tables 1-17 or 1-18.  
Inactive  
Bi-d.  
Active  
Uni-d.  
1-8  
Off  
2-1 to 2-4  
2-5 to 2-8  
3-1  
Page length for front tractor  
Page length for rear tractor  
Auto tear-off  
Refer to Table 1-19.  
Refer to Table 1-20.  
Inactive  
All Off  
All Off  
Off  
Active  
3-2  
Zero slash  
Inactive  
Active  
Off  
3-3  
Auto line feed  
Inactive  
Active  
Off  
3-4  
3-5  
3-6  
3-7  
Buzzer  
Active  
Inactive  
Table 2  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Active  
Table 1  
Active  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Auto CR (IBM 2381 Plus)  
IBM character table  
Auto cut mode  
3-8  
4-1  
4-2  
4-3 to 4-4  
4-5 to 4-6  
4-7 to 4-8  
5-1  
5-2  
5-3  
Software  
Input buffer  
Auto I/F wait time  
I/F mode  
Serial I/F parity  
Serial I/F baud rate  
Overlapping multi-part forms  
Continuous forms with labels  
Skip over binding  
Paper memory  
ESC/P  
Active  
10 sec.  
Refer to Table 1-21.  
Refer to Table 1-22.  
Refer to Table 1-23.  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Inactive  
IBM 2381Plus  
Inactive  
30 sec.  
Off  
Off  
Off  
All Off  
All Off  
All Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Memory b  
-
5-4  
5-5 to 5-8  
Memory a  
-
Off  
Off  
(reserved)  
1-28  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
Table 1-17. Character Table Setting (Standard)  
SW 1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4 SW1-5 SW1-6 Character table  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
PC437 (US, standard Europe)  
PC850 (Multilingual)  
PC860 (Portuguese)  
PC861 (Icelandic)  
PC863 (Canadian-French)  
PC865 (Nordic)  
Abicomp  
BRASCII  
Roman 8  
ISO Latin 1  
Italic USA  
Italic France  
Italic German  
Italic U.K  
Italic Denmark  
Italic Sweden  
Italic Italy  
Italic Spain  
Others PC437  
Table 1-18. Character Table Setting (NLSP)  
SW 1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4 SW1-5 SW1-6 Character table  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
PC437 (US, standard Europe)  
PC850 (Multilingual)  
PC437 Greek  
PC852 East Europe  
PC853  
PC855 (Cyrillic)  
PC857 (Turkish)  
PC866 (Russian)  
PC869 (Greek)  
MAZOWIA (Poland)  
Code MJK (CSFR)  
ISO 8859-7 (Latin/Greek)  
ISO Latin 1T (Turkish)  
Bulgaria (Bulgarian)  
Estonia (Estonia)  
PC774 (LST 1283:1993)  
ISO8859-2  
PC866LAT (Latvian)  
PC866 UKR  
PCAPTEC  
PC708  
PC720  
PC AR864  
PC860(Portuguese)  
PC861(Ielandic)  
PC865(Nordic)  
Italic USA  
Italic France  
Italic German  
Italic U.K  
Italic Denmark  
Italic Sweden  
Italic Italy  
Italic Spain  
Others PC437  
1-29  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Table 1-19. Front Tractor Page Length  
SW2-1  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
SW2-2 SW2-3 SW2-4 Page length for front tractor  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
11 inches  
3 inches  
3.5 inches  
4 inches  
5.5 inches  
6 inches  
7 inches  
8 inches  
8.5 inches  
70 / 6 inches  
12 inches  
14 inches  
17 inches  
Others  
Others 11 inches  
Table 1-20. Rear Tractor Page Length  
SW2-1  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
SW2-2 SW2-3 SW2-4 Page length for rear tractor  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
11 inches  
3 inches  
3.5 inches  
4 inches  
5.5 inches  
6 inches  
7 inches  
8 inches  
8.5 inches  
70 / 6 inches  
12 inches  
14 inches  
17 inches  
Others  
Others 11 inches  
Table 1-21. I/F Selection  
SW4-3  
Off  
SW4-4  
Off  
I/F Mode  
Auto  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
Parallel I/F  
Serial I/F  
Optional I/F  
Table 1-22. Serial I/F Parity Setting  
SW4-5  
Off  
SW4-6  
Off  
Serial parity  
None  
Off  
On  
Odd  
On  
Off  
Even  
On  
On  
Ignore  
Table 1-23. Serial I/F Baud Rate Setting  
SW4-7  
Off  
Off  
SW4-8  
Off  
On  
Baud rate  
19200  
9600  
On  
Off  
4800  
On  
On  
2400  
1-30  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.4.4 Functions  
1.4.4.1 Usual operation  
Front / Rear:  
Changes the front and rear paper path alternately.  
Normal paper is set and the pull tractor is not used:  
The printer feeds the paper to the tear off position and cut the paper by the cutter, and feeds backward to  
paper park position. If the cutter is not used, it goes incomplete changing paper error. So cut the paper at  
the top of paper and push Pause switch or Front/Rear switch, and the printer feeds the paper backward.  
After the paper is out, the printer loads the paper from another path’s tractor.  
Overlapping multi-part forms or continuous forms with labels is set or pull tractor is used:  
Incomplete changing paper error is occurred immediately. Cut the bottom of paper at current page and  
push Pause switch or Front/Rear switch, and the printer feeds the paper forward. After the paper is out,  
the printer loads the paper from another path’s tractor.  
Pause:  
This switch alternates printer activity between printing and non-printing.  
Hold this switch down over 3 seconds, and the printer resets all data.  
Push this switch when incomplete changing paper is occurred, then go to the next step.  
Micro feed:  
Adjusts the paper position including “Top of Form" and “Tear off” positions. The ! switch advances the  
paper forward by 1/216-inch step, and switch advances the paper backwards by 1/216-inch step.  
LF/FF Load:  
Pressing it loads continuous paper when the printer is out of paper.  
Pressing it shortly executes line feed.  
Holding it down for a few seconds executes form feed.  
Top of Form:  
Advances the paper so that the characters' base line can be adjusted at the mark of ribbon mask holder,  
and enters the “Top of form adjustment” mode. The “Top of Form” LED turns on and the TOF position is  
adjustable with the “Micro Feed” switches in this mode.  
When the “Top of Form” switch is pressed again, this mode is terminated. The adjustment position is  
stored as TOF, and the paper is fed back to the position before this mode.  
When TOF adjustment is executed just after loading, the adjusted position will be treated as the loading  
position.  
This switch is only available when the cover opens.  
Tear Off:  
Advances the paper until its perforation comes to the paper cutting part of the printer cover, and enters the  
tear off mode. The “Tear off” LED turns on and the Tear off position is adjustable with the “Micro Feed”  
switches in this mode.  
When the “Tear Off” switch is pressed again, this mode is terminated. The adjustment position is stored  
as the tear off position, and the paper is feed back to the position before this mode.  
This mode is terminated also by the data arrival from host computers.  
Copy:  
Pressing it select copy mode or normal mode.  
Pitch:  
Pressing it selects one of following pitches;  
10 cpi, 12 cpi, 15 cpi, 17 cpi, 20 cpi and PS (proportional spacing).  
Font:  
Pressing it selects one of following fonts.  
Super Draft, Draft, Roman, Sans serif  
1-31  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Paper Select:  
Pressing it selects one of the following paper Numbers.  
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 : When the printer has the paper information.  
0 :  
Always  
a, b :  
When the printer has the paper memory data.  
Normal paper is set and the pull tractor is not used:  
The printer feeds the paper to the tear off position and cut the paper by the cutter, and feeds it backward  
to the paper park position. If the cutter is not used, it goes incomplete changing paper error. So cut at the  
top of paper and push Pause switch, then the printer feeds backward. After the paper is put, the printer  
loads selected paper. If incomplete changing paper error is occurred, set the selected paper and push  
Pause switch.  
Overlapping multi-part forms or continuous forms with labels is set, or pull tractor is used:  
Incomplete changing paper error is occurred immediately. Cut the bottom of paper at current page and  
push Pause switch, then the printer feeds the paper forward. After the paper is out, the printer loads the  
selected paper. If incomplete changing paper error is occurred, set the selected paper and push Pause  
switch.  
Current paper No. is a or b :  
The printer feeds the paper forward. If the printer can't aware out of paper status, it goes incomplete  
changing paper path error.  
If incomplete changing paper path error is occurred, please cut at the bottom of paper and push Pause  
switch, then the printer ejects the paper forward.  
Current paper No. is not a or b :  
The printer feeds the paper to the tear-off position and cut the paper by cutter and feeds backward to  
paper park position. If cutter is not used or the printer fails to feed the paper to paper park position, it goes  
incomplete changing paper path error.  
If incomplete changing paper path error is occurred at the tear off position, please cut at the top of paper  
and push Pause switch, then the printer feeds the paper backward.  
1-32  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.4.4.2 Operation at Power On  
Self test:  
Prints the self test pattern. To cancel it, make printer pause and turn off the power.  
DIP switch setting print:  
Starts the setting printing mode.  
Data dump:  
Starts the data dump mode, in which all the input data are printed as hexadecimal numbers and  
corresponding characters.  
Clear EEPROM Area 1:  
Resets the printer to the standard factory setting, except mechanism data area.  
(i.e. This function is for emergency.)  
Clear EEPROM Area 2:  
Resets the printer to the standard factory setting, only mechanism data area.  
(i.e. This function is for emergency and service.)  
Clear Driving Line count for ribbon change timing:  
Resets the printer to the standard factory setting, only driving line count for ribbon change timing.  
Paper memory setting:  
This makes it possible to print properly on the forms which contain two areas having different thickness in  
a form and paper type.  
Mechanism adjustment:  
Starts the mechanism parameter adjustment mode. You can adjust Beta parameter, flight time parameter,  
and Bi-D parameter through this mode.  
Platen gap adjustment:  
Starts the platen gap parameter adjustment mode. You can input Alpha parameter and adjust Beta  
parameters through this mode.  
Measurement seeking:  
Starts the measurement seeking automatically The carriage stopping length is measured and saved in the  
EEPROM.  
1-33  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.4.4.3 Built-in Detection  
Cover open detection:  
When the cover is opened, the printer stops printing and enters the pause mode automatically after  
several beeps. The printer stays at the state until the cover is closed and the “Pause” switch is pressed.  
Several printer settings loaded at each power-on can be changed in this operation.  
Paper width detection:  
The printer detects the right paper edge and determines the right end of printable area. The print patterns  
which exceed that end won't be printed.  
Automatic paper thickness adjustment:  
This printer measures the paper thickness after every paper loading. The distance between print head and  
the platen is automatically adjusted for proper printing according to the paper thickness.  
Skip over binding:  
This function is used to print on a multi-part form with the binding which scratches the print head during  
paper feeding.  
If this function is used, the print head parks apart from those bindings during paper feeding to avoid paper  
jam. This function can be selected by DIP switch and the through-put will be reduced at that time.  
Auto cut mode:  
The printer cuts the paper at the perforation position automatically while data is printing.  
This function is valid when the perforation cutter is used, selected by DIP SW 3-7, and the paper length is  
more than 4-inch. The setting of the printer driver has priority over DIP SW 3-7.  
Do not use this mode for labels, continuous forms with labels, and overlapping multi-part forms.  
Automatic TOF position setting:  
When TOF position is different from loading position with the printer power on, the printer feeds the paper  
to the next TOF position automatically.  
1-34  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.4.5 Paper Memory Function  
You can get better printing quality when you print on overlapping multi-part forms or on continuous forms  
with labels by using the paper memory function.  
When you use this function, you have to write the information of paper thickness to the printer using DIP  
switches and the control panel in advance.  
This function is available only with the front paper path.  
How to recall memories :  
You can recall paper memories which you have already written some information in advance when you  
selects paper No. a or No. b by paper select switch.  
No. a : recall the memory a  
No. b : recall the memory b  
Notes:  
1. 1-inch skip perforation area is automatically included for the overlapping multi-part  
forms.  
2. ESC C, ESC (C, ESC (c is valid while the paper memory function is used.  
3. ESC N is valid while the paper memory function is used, but if the skip length is less  
than 1-inch, the setting will be ignored when overlapping multi-part forms is used.  
4. ESC 0 is invalid while the paper memory function for overlapping multi-part forms is  
used.  
.
5. The loading position must be adjusted for overlapping multi-part forms at every  
loading.  
6. If paper position doesn't correspond with TOF when turn on the printer, paper is  
advanced to the top of the next page automatically.  
How to write the information of a paper except “Continuous forms with labels" :  
1) Make sure the printer is turns off.  
2) Select the memory you want to write the information (See DIP SW setting.).  
3) Select the page length (See DIP SW setting.).  
4) Select the paper type (See DIP SW setting.).  
5) Turn the printer on while both sides of Paper Select switch are depressed.  
6) The printer writes the information in the memory you selected, and beeps.  
How to write the information of "Continuous forms with labels” :  
1) Make sure the printer is turn off.  
2) Select the memory you want to write the information (See DIP SW setting.).  
3) Select the page length (See DIP SW setting.).  
4) Select the paper type (See DIP SW setting.). .  
5) Turn the printer on while both sides of Paper Select switch are depressed.  
6) Point the label position when you use the paper with a label.  
a) Open the printer cover.  
b) Move the pointer (Refer to Figure 1-23.) to one of the label's corner.  
up / down …Feed the paper by “Micro Feed” switches  
right / left … Move the printing head by manually.  
c) Press “Top of Form” switch.  
d) Move the pointer to the diagonal corner of the label.  
e) Press “Top of Form” switch.  
f) Close the printer cover.  
7) Confirm the writing sequence was done correctly by beep sounds.  
Once or twice: The information are written to the memory a or b correctly.  
3 times : The sequence was not correct, and it was ignored.  
Figure 1-23. Pointer  
1-35  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.4.6 Initializations  
1.4.6.1 Power-on Initialization  
The initialization of this level is activated by power-on or /INIT signal (negative pulse) or cold-reset  
command (remote RS command). This initialization is:  
to initialize the printer mechanism.  
to clear the all buffers of data.  
to cancel the download character definition.  
to make the printer stand-by state, if no errors occur.  
to execute software initialization.  
1.4.6.2 Software Initialization  
The initialization of this level is activated by the control code ESC @ for ESC/P or ESC [K for  
IBM/LEXMARK2381 Plus. This initialization is:  
to make the printer setting to default.  
1.4.6.3 Panel Initialization  
The initialization performed by the control panel operation. This initialization is:  
to clear all data in the buffer.  
to execute software initialization.  
1-36  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.5 MAIN COMPONENT  
The main components of the DFX-8500 are as follows:  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
Printer mechanism:  
Main control board:  
Mechanism driver board: C204 DRV board  
½ Printhead driver board: C204 DRV-B board  
DIP SW. board:  
Power supply board:  
Control Panel:  
Housing:  
M-3I60  
C204 MAIN board  
C204 SUB board  
C204 PSB/PSE board unit  
Panel unit  
C
R
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
J
u
n
c
P
a
n
e
l
U
n
i
t
H
e
a
d
C
a
b
l
e
B
o
a
r
d
C
2
P
0
S
4
B
/
P
S
E
B
o
C
J
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
B
o
a
r
d
C
C
2
2
0
0
4
4
M
D
A
I
N
B
o
a
r
d
,
C
2
R
V
-
B
B
o
a
r
d
,
a
Figure 1-24. Main Components  
1-37  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.5.1 M-3I60 Printer Mechanism  
The M-3I60 printer mechanism is a 18-pin (9-pin two lows), serial impact dot matrix printer mechanism  
developed for the DFX-8500. It is designed to provide high-speed, high-volume printing, and is especially  
heavy and durable when compared with existing terminal printer mechanisms, Its paper feeding  
mechanism uses several kinds of fan-fold paper, and an automatic mechanism is included to provide  
enhanced paper handling.  
The structural differences between the DFX-8500 and the DFX-8000 are:  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
DFX-8500 includes a CR motor isolation resistance sensor.  
DFX-8500 includes a paper jam sensor.  
DFX-8500 includes a ribbon jam sensor.  
To prevent paper jams, the DFX-8500 includes a tractor wire at the front and rear tractors.  
The detection method of the carriage encoder sensor has been changed. In the DFX-8000, the  
encoder plate was attached to the rotor of the CR motor, while the DFX-8500 uses a belt-type  
encoder.  
‰ꢀ  
DFX-8500 does not include a carriage home position sensor.  
Figure 1-25. M-3I60 Printer Mechanism  
1-38  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.5.2 Main Control Board (C204 MAIN Board)  
The C204 MAIN board is a main controller board. The board contains following ICs:  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
16-bit CPU:  
Gate array:  
PROM (including C.G.) : 2M-bit (IC5)  
TMP95C051A; 24.57 MHz (IC2)  
E05B36 (IC1)  
RAM  
4M-bit (IC14)  
RS-232C level converter (IC9)  
PST391D(IC13)  
ADM232L  
RESET IC  
EEPROM  
93C66 (IC11)  
There are two types of C204 MAIN board used as after service parts. The following Table shows  
differences between them.  
Figure 1-26. C204 MAIN Board  
Table 1-24. Color Attribute  
For USA and Pacific  
Inch  
For Europe  
Metric  
Serial I/F Hexagonal-head screw type  
1-39  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.5.3 C204 DRV Board  
The C204 DRV board is the driver board specially for the printer mechanism. The ½ printhead, printhead  
fan, plunger, PF (paper feed) motor, CR (carriage) motor, CR fan, PG (platen gap) motor, and RF (ribbon  
feed) motor drive circuits are located on the driver boards.  
Sensor signals from the printer mechanism are connected to the main board via these boards.  
Major ICs on the DRV are as follows:  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
‰ꢀ  
.
CR motor drive IC:  
PF motor drive IC:  
Comparator IC:  
STK561 (IC1)  
STK5713B (IC2)  
uPC393C (IC3)  
Figure 1-27. C204 DRV Board  
1-40  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.5.4 C204 DRV-B Board  
The C204 DRV-B board is the ½ printhead driver board. The drive part is mainly consists of the discrete  
bipolar FETs.  
Figure 1-28. C204 DRV-B Board  
1.5.5 C204 SUB Board  
The C204 SUB board consists of five DIP switch units. It is located behind the front paper cover.  
Figure 1-29. C204 SUB Board Unit  
1-41  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
1.5.6 C204 PSB/PSE Board  
C204 PSB/PSE board is a power supply circuit board which generates the power for the control circuit  
(main control board) and printer mechanism drive circuit (driver board). It contains cooling fan on the top.  
The PSB board is a 100-120 V AC version, and the PSE board is for 220-240 VAC.  
Figure 1-30. C204 PSB/PSE Board  
1-42  
Rev. B  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.5.7 Control Panel  
The control panel for this printer consists of switches, LEDs, and buzzers (Refer to Figure 1-22 on page  
1-23.).  
1.5.8 Housing  
The housing used in the DFX-8500 consists of many more components than previous designs.  
The lower case is used as the main frame which holds the mechanism and circuits, and they are covered  
by the upper case, bottom plate and side cover, each of which has various covers. The housing large  
openings in both the front and rear for paper entrance and exit. It also has a lid on the both plate to enable  
the PROM on the main board to be easily replaced.  
Figure 1-31. Housing  
1-43  
Rev. B  
CHAPTER 2  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.1 PRINTER MECHANISM OPERATION..................................................................2-1  
2.1.1 Printhead Mechanism ........................................................................................................... 2-4  
2.1.2 Carriage Mechanism ............................................................................................................. 2-5  
2.1.3 Platen Gap Adjustment Mechanism .................................................................................... 2-6  
2.1.4 Paper Feed Mechanism......................................................................................................... 2-7  
2.1.4.1 Tractor Wire Operation............................................................................................. 2-9  
2.1.5 Ribbon Feed and Tractor Select Mechanisms.................................................................. 2-10  
2.1.6 Plunger Mechanism............................................................................................................. 2-12  
2.2 POWER SUPPLY OPERATION..........................................................................2-13  
2.2.1 Power Supply Overview...................................................................................................... 2-14  
2.3 CONTROL CIRCUIT ...........................................................................................2-13  
2.3.1 Control Circuit Operation Overview .................................................................................. 2-17  
2.3.2 Reset Circuit......................................................................................................................... 2-21  
2.3.3 Sensor Circuits .................................................................................................................... 2-22  
2.3.4 CR Motor Drive Circuit........................................................................................................ 2-25  
2.3.5 PF Motor Drive Circuit......................................................................................................... 2-29  
2.3.6 RF Motor Drive Circuit ........................................................................................................ 2-30  
2.3.7 PG Motor Drive Circuit........................................................................................................ 2-31  
2.3.8 Plunger Drive Circuit........................................................................................................... 2-32  
2.3.9 Printhead Drive Circuit........................................................................................................ 2-33  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.1 PRINTER MECHANISM OPERATION  
This section describes the Model 3I60 printer mechanism and explains how the printer works. The Model  
3I60 printer mechanism features a 18-pin, impact dot printhead for serial printing. The printer mechanism is  
the main component of the printer and is supported by the other components (the power supply and control  
circuits). Figure 2-1 shows the Model 3I60 printer mechanism.  
Printhead  
Paper Bail Assembly  
Plunger  
TIMING BELT, PF  
Connector  
Junction  
Board  
Tractor Assembly (Front)  
RF Motor  
PG Motor`  
Figure 2-1. M-3I60 Printer Mechanism  
The printer mechanism consists of the following main components:  
Printhead :  
The printhead is the component that actually prints characters (dot matrix patterns). Printing is performed by  
striking the pins (arranged in a vertical line) against the surface of the paper and the ribbon. A character is  
printed by repeating this printing operation in the horizontal direction (as the printhead moves). The printhead  
includes a head fan and temperature sensor. The head fan also has a thermistor. When the printhead or fan  
is too hot, the printer stops printing until it cools. (Refer to Section 2.3.9 Printhead Drive Circuit.)  
Plunger mechanism :  
During printing, the paper bail assembly holds the paper under tension so that it is fed smoothly. When paper  
is loaded or ejected or when the tear off function is executed, the paper bail assembly needs to move up to  
prevent a paper jam. The plunger moves the paper bail assembly up.  
2-1  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Carriage mechanism :  
The carriage mechanism moves the printhead in the horizontal direction. The CR motor drives the carriage,  
with the printhead on it. The CR encoder sensor detects the CR motor speed and carriage position. The CR  
motor is closed-loop controlled. Because the CR motor is driven at a very high speed, it includes an isolation  
resistance sensor to detect abnormal resistance. The sensor detects an error if the resistance is less than  
2.2 K ohms. (Refer to Section 2.3.4 CR Motor Drive Circuit.)  
Interlock switch :  
Because the carriage moves at a very high speed, it would be dangerous if a hand or finger were inserted  
inside the printer mechanism during printing. Therefore, as a safety measure, when the top cover is opened,  
the interlock switch cuts the drive voltage to the CR motor to slow down the carriage speed and prevent  
accidents. A control circuit controls CR motor driver deceleration. (Refer to Section 2.3.4 CR Motor Drive  
Circuit.) Printing resumes when the top cover is closed.  
Auto platen gap adjustment mechanism :  
The printer mechanism has an automatic platen gap adjustment function that measures the thickness of the  
paper and provides the appropriate gap between the platen and printhead. The platen gap is adjusted by  
moving the carriage (and printhead) either forward or backward. Because the front and rear carriage guide  
shafts which hold the carriage are purposely mounted off-center, the carriage moves as the PG motor rotates  
the shafts. The PG sensor transmits the amount of movement (= gap) to the control circuit.  
Ribbon feed mechanism :  
The printer's ribbon cartridge contains an endless ribbon. The ribbon feed mechanism takes up the ribbon so  
that the portion hit by the pins is constantly changing. The RF motor drives the ribbon feed mechanism.  
Interlock Switch  
SHAF, CR, GUIDE, REAR  
CR Motor  
PG Motor  
Printhead  
TIMING BELT, CR  
RF Motor  
Carriage Encoder Belt  
DETECTOR, CR  
PG Home  
Position Sensor  
Figure 2-2. Printer Mechanism Operation 1  
2-2  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
Paper feed mechanism :  
The CR motor controls printing in the horizontal direction, and the paper feed mechanism controls movement  
in the vertical direction (line feeding and form feeding). The paper feed mechanism feeds paper vertically.  
The PF motor drives the paper feed mechanism.  
The front, rear, and top PE sensors detect whether paper is present in the paper path, and stop the printer  
from printing when there is no paper. The printer is equipped with three PE sensors: the front PE sensor at  
the front tractor, the rear PE sensor at the rear tractor, and the top PE sensor at the paper bail.  
The pull tractor sensor detects whether the optional pull tractor unit is installed.  
The printer is also equipped with a paper jam sensor. The control circuit reads the signals from the sensors  
and indicates when an error occurs.  
Tractor select mechanism :  
The printer mechanism has two paper entrances: one at the front tractor and one at the rear tractor. By  
controlling the RF motor, the tractor select mechanism chooses which tractor to use, and power from the PF  
motor is conveyed via a series of gears. The tractor select sensor detects the selected tractor and signals  
that information to the control circuit.  
Paper  
Pull Tractor Unit  
Paper Bail Assembly  
Pull Tractor Sensor  
Plunger  
Top PE Sensor  
Printhead  
Paper Jam Sensor  
Tractor Select Sensor  
Rear PE Sensor  
Front PE  
Sensor  
Rear Tractor Sprocket  
PF Motor  
RF Motor  
Front Tractor  
Sprocket  
Figure 2-3. Printer Mechanism Operation 2  
2-3  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
2.1.1 Printhead Mechanism  
The printhead is a charge-type, impact dot printhead. Figure 2-4 shows its operation. The dot wire is attached  
to the actuating spring at point A. It is pulled back (left in the figure) by magnetic force when power is applied  
and during standby. The magnetic force holds back the actuating spring. When current flows through the coil,  
a counter-magnetic field is induced in the coil. Then, the actuating spring ejects the dot wire forward against  
the ink ribbon, printing a dot on the paper.  
Actuating Spring  
+35 VDC  
GND  
Mask Holder (Cutting)  
Platen Assembly  
Dot Wire  
Iron Core  
Ribbon  
Printhead Drive Coil  
Figure 2-4. Printhead Mechanism  
2-4  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.1.2 Carriage Mechanism  
Figure 2-5 shows the carriage mechanism. The front and rear carriage guide shafts support the carriage. The  
rotation of the CR motor is transmitted to the carriage timing belt through the carriage belt pulleys at the right  
and left sides. The printhead is mounted on the carriage, which is attached to the carriage timing belt and  
moves horizontally.  
The printer does not have a carriage home position sensor; the home position is detected using disordered  
pulses of the CR motor and CR encoder sensor (linear, belt-type). The head dumpers are attached to the left  
and right sides of the frame. These pads are used for the absorbs the carriage hit shock for both side. The  
control circuit monitors the CR motor's pulse; when it is disordered, the control circuit recognizes the carriage  
home position.  
The encoder belt has equally pitched slits and is mounted under the timing belt. A photo interrupter (CR  
encoder) surrounds the encoder belt and converts the carriage movement into a pulse train.  
P
a
p
e
r
W
i
d
t
h
S
e
n
s
o
r
H
e
a
d
D
u
m
p
e
r
(
L
e
f
t
)
P
r
i
n
t
h
e
a
d
R
i
b
b
o
n
M
a
s
k
H
o
S
H
A
F
T
,
C
R
,
G
U
C
R
B
e
l
t
P
u
l
l
e
y
C
R
M
o
t
o
r
C
R
E
n
c
o
d
e
r
S
e
n
s
o
r
S
H
A
F
T
,
C
R
,
G
U
I
D
E
,
F
R
O
N
T
C
R
E
n
c
o
d
e
r
B
e
l
t
T
I
M
I
N
G
B
E
L
T
,
C
R
Figure 2-5. Carriage Mechanism  
2-5  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
2.1.3 Platen Gap Adjustment Mechanism  
Figure 2-6 shows the platen gap adjustment mechanism. The front and rear carriage guide shafts supporting  
the carriage have a vertical section. The rotation of the PG motor is transmitted to the rear carriage guide  
shaft through the gears. Counterclockwise rotation of the motor expands the platen gap and clockwise  
rotation reduces it.  
The encoder plate with equally pitched slits is attached coaxially to the motor axis. When the motor rotates,  
the PC sensor detects it and outputs the pulses. Each pulse corresponds to detection of a 0.0025 mm  
resolution (horizontal distance). The system range is 0.35 to 0.84 mm.  
P
l
a
t
e
n
A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
P
R
i
b
b
o
n
M
a
s
k
H
o
l
d
e
r
r
i
n
t
h
e
a
d
S
H
A
F
T
,
C
R
,
G
U
I
D
E
,
R
E
A
R
P
l
a
t
e
n
R
o
l
l
e
r
G
e
a
r
P
l
a
t
e
n
R
o
l
l
e
r
T
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
G
e
a
r
P
l
a
t
e
n
G
a
p
S
e
n
s
o
r
C
C
W
C
P
l
a
t
e
n
G
a
p
E
n
c
o
d
e
r
P
l
a
t
e
P
M
l
a
t
e
n
G
a
p
W
o
t
o
r
Figure 2-6. Platen Gap Adjustment Mechanism  
2-6  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.1.4 Paper Feed Mechanism  
Figures 2-7, 2-8, and 2-9 show the paper feed mechanism. After the printer loads the paper, it is fed by the  
tension roller, platen roller, and front or rear tractor assembly.  
The PF motor rotates the tension roller and tractor select gear (Figures 2-8 and 2-9) and moves either the  
front or rear tractor assembly. The rotation of the paper feed transmission gear rotates the tractor select gear,  
which can engage either tractor train. The tractor select mechanism alternates the engagement of the rear  
tractor assembly gear train and front tractor assembly gear train. (Refer to Section 2.1.5 Ribbon Feed and  
Tractor Select Mechanisms.)  
The front and rear PE sensors are incorporated in the tractor sprocket. When paper is loaded, the paper  
pushes the leaf spring and blocks the photo interrupter. When no paper is loaded, the photo interrupter is not  
blocked. The top PE sensor is attached to the upper paper guide and is used with the reflection plate on the  
paper bail assembly. When there is no paper, the reflection plate reflects the beam; when paper is loaded,  
the beam is absorbed (not reflected). The Pull tractor sensor monitors whether the pull tractor is installed.  
Paper Bail Lever  
Pull Tractor Sensor  
Top PE Sensor  
TIMING BELT, PF  
Platen Gear  
Tension Roller  
Tension Pulley  
Tractor Select Gear  
Paper Feed  
Transmission Gear  
PF Motor  
Pinion Gear  
Figure 2-7. Tension Roller and PF Roller Operation  
2-7  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Paper  
Paper Bail  
Tension Roller  
Tractor Select Gear  
Front PE Sensor  
PF Motor  
Pinion Gear  
Tractor Sprocket (Front)  
PF Transmission Gear  
Figure 2-8. Front Tractor Assembly Operation  
Paper  
Paper Bail  
Tension Roller  
Tractor Select Gear  
Rear PE Sensor  
PF Transmission Gear  
Tractor Sprocket (Rear)  
PF Motor  
Pinion  
Figure 2-9. Rear Tractor Assembly Operation  
2-8  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.1.4.1 Tractor Wire Operation  
The printer is equipped with a tractor wire (white line) to prevent paper jams when continuous paper is  
loaded from the front or rear entrance. The tractor tension spring on the right side frame pulls the wire and  
releases the stress on the continuous paper being fed. Figure 2-10 shows how the tractor wire operates.  
The front left tractor sprocket or rear right tractor sprocket is fixed in position by the shape of the bottom  
frame of the printer mechanism, while the other sprocket (the front right sprocket or rear left sprocket) can  
move along the tractor shafts. When the tractor release lever is released, the sprocket can move smoothly  
side to side along the tractor shafts. When the tractor release lever is engaged, the sprocket can move  
along the tractor shafts, but it cannot move smoothly, because the tractor wire tension is valid.  
In the Figure 2-10, point A shows the movement range of the left tractor sprocket when the tractor release  
lever is released. Point B shows the movement range of the right tractor sprocket when the release lever  
is engaged or released.  
If the paper in the printer becomes bubbled, you can pull the tractor wire to the right to stabilize the paper  
tension between the left and right tractor sprockets.  
Tension  
Tractor Wire  
Tractor Wire  
Tension Spring  
(in case of front enterance)  
Figure 2-10. Tractor Wire Operation  
2-9  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
2.1.5 Ribbon Feed and Tractor Select Mechanisms  
The RF motor supplies power to both the ribbon feed and tractor select mechanisms. The rotation of the  
RF motor pinion swings the ribbon feed select gear like a pendulum, using the lever axis as a support  
point. The rotation of the RF motor is transmitted after the gears are engaged. When the RF motor pinion  
gear rotates counterclockwise, the motor rotates the ribbon feed mechanism; when it rotates clockwise,  
the motor rotates the tractor select mechanism.  
Ribbon feed mechanism :  
Figure 2-11 shows the ribbon feed mechanism. The ribbon is fed in only one direction. Counterclockwise  
rotation of the RF motor is transmitted to the ribbon feed gear through the ribbon feed select gear and  
ribbon feed transmission gear. The ribbon feed drive gear engages the winding roller on the ribbon  
cartridge to feed the ribbon.  
Winding Roller  
Ribbon Cartridge  
RF Select Gear  
RF Drive Gear  
RF Transmission Gear  
RF Motor  
Figure 2-11. Ribbon Feed Mechanism  
2-10  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
Tractor select mechanism :  
Figure 2-12 shows the operation of the tractor select mechanism. Clockwise rotation of the RF motor is  
transmitted to the tractor select cam through the ribbon feed select gear and tractor select transmission  
gear, and rotates the tractor select cam clockwise. The tractor select lever contacts the inside curve of the  
cam due to the spring force; when the cam rotates, the tractor select lever moves horizontally along the  
curve.  
When the tractor select lever is set to the left, the tractor select gear engages the rear tractor assembly  
train, and the PF motor rotates the rear tractor assembly. When the tractor select lever is set to the right,  
the tractor select gear engages the front tractor assembly. The tractor Select sensor contacts the cam and  
closes when it reaches the convex portion.  
The ribbon jam sensor is used to detect ribbon jam condition and to count ribbon life.  
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
D
r
i
v
e
D
e
a
r
T
T
r
a
a
c
n
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
r
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
G
e
a
r
T
H
r
a
c
d
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
G
e
a
r
o
l
e
r
T
L
r
r
a
a
c
c
t
t
o
o
r
r
S
S
e
e
l
l
e
e
c
c
t
t
e
e
v
v
e
e
r
r
L
U
o
w
e
e
r
r
T
L
p
p
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
S
e
n
s
o
r
C
o
n
v
e
x
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
C
a
m
T
T
r
r
a
a
c
n
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
G
e
a
r
R
S
i
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
e
l
e
c
t
G
e
a
r
R
F
M
o
t
o
r
R
i
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
G
e
a
r
R
i
b
b
o
n
J
a
m
S
e
n
s
o
r
Figure 2-12. Tractor Select Mechanism  
2-11  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
2.1.6 Plunger Mechanism  
Figure 2-13 shows the plunger mechanism. The paper bail assembly is attached to the end of the plunger's  
iron core. The paper bail assembly axis is connected to the frame. When the plunger coil is energized, the  
force of the paper bail spring returns the paper bail assembly to its original position.  
Paper Bail ASSY. Lever  
Plunger  
Iron Core  
Coil  
Tension Spring  
Figure 2-13. Plunger Mechanism  
2-12  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.2 POWER SUPPLY OPERATION  
The printer can be powered by either of two power supply boards: the 120 V C204 PSB board or the 220/240  
V C204 PSE board. The only difference in the operation of these two boards is in the primary circuitry. They  
supply power to the printer in the same way. The power supply board outputs the DC current required to drive  
the control circuits and printer drive mechanism. Table 2-1 shows the input voltages and fuse ratings of the  
boards and Table 2-2 shows the PSB/PSE board output specification.  
Table 2-1. Power Supply Boards Input  
Board  
C204 PSB board  
C204 PSE board  
Input Voltage  
120 VAC  
220-240 VAC  
Fuse Ratings  
12 A /125 VAC  
6.3 A / 250 VAC  
Table 2-2. Power Supply Board Output Specification  
+37 VDC Line  
+5V DC Line  
Item  
VP1  
VP2  
+37.0 VDC  
35.5 - 37.5 VDC  
VP3  
Rating Output Voltage  
Available Output  
+5.0 VDC  
4.75 - 5.25 VDC  
Voltage Fluctuation  
Rating Output Current  
Available Output  
1.5 A  
0.0 - 4.5 A*1)  
2.0 A  
0.0 - 2.0 A  
0.0 - 5.0 A*1)  
Current Fluctuation  
Over Current Protection  
Over Current Protection  
Reset Method  
Short Circuit Current  
Over Voltage Protection  
Over Voltage Protection  
Reset Method  
Yes  
Yes  
Turn the power switch off, then turn it again. Or  
controlled by C204 MAIN board with /PD signal.  
Less than 1.0 A  
Automatically recovered.  
Less than 1.0 A  
Yes  
Automatically recovered.  
Yes  
Turn the power switch off, then turn it again.  
Over Voltage Limit Value  
42 VDC  
7 VDC  
*1): +37 V DC line Maximum in total is 13.0 A.  
2-13  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
2.2.1 Power Supply Overview  
Figure 2-14 shows a block diagram of the C204 PSB/PSE board.  
Surge Cut  
(at Power On)  
CN1  
L
Fuse  
Power  
SW.  
Input Filter  
Circuit  
Rectifier  
Circuit  
Smoothing  
Circuit  
N
AC Inlet  
T1  
+37V  
+37V Line  
Switching  
1/2  
(VP1/VP2)  
Smoothing  
Circuit  
CN3  
CN4  
GP1  
GP2  
GP1  
Over Current  
Protection  
GP  
GP2  
Current Limit  
Monitoring  
CL  
Power Down  
Control  
AC Source  
PC101  
PC102  
PD  
DRERR  
SD  
Constant  
Voltage  
Control  
VP3 Down  
Monitoring  
Over Voltage  
Protection  
+5V Regulator  
Circuit  
PC1  
T2  
+5V  
GL  
Overcurrent  
Protection  
+5V Regulator  
+37V Line  
Switching  
2/2  
+37V  
(VP3)  
Smoothing  
Circuit  
CN2  
CN5  
GP3  
GL  
Constant  
Voltage  
Control  
Current Limit  
Monitoring  
Abnormal  
Current  
(VP1/VP2)  
Monitoring  
GP3  
PC201  
Fan Driver  
FANDR  
GP  
Figure 2-14. Power Supply Board Block Diagram  
2-14  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
General :  
The power supply board converts the AC input voltage to the DC voltages required to operate the printer. The  
AC voltage is input to the AC inlet, and is supplied to the C204 PSB/PSE board via the power switch and a  
fuse.  
Two main switching regulator circuits consist of two blocks, +37 V Lines ½ and 2/2. The one convert the AC  
voltage to the +37 VDC specially for the print head coils drive requirement. The other convert the AC voltage  
to the +37 VDC for the printer mechanism drive power requirement (motors, solenoid, etc.) and for the  
source of +5 V DC regulator circuit requirement (Refer to Table 2-3.).  
37V line block ½ :  
The generated +37 VDC is divided into two destinations; nine of the eighteen printhead pins (pins 1, 2, 7, 9,  
10, 11, 12, 15, and 17); the other to nine of the eighteen printhead pins (pins 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 13, 14, 16 and 18).  
37V line block 2/2 :  
The generated +37 VDC is supplied to the motors and plunger on the printer mechanism, it also supplied to  
the +5VDC regulator circuit and it output. +5V DC is supplied to the logic circuit on the main circuit.  
Cooling fan :  
The C204 PSB/PSE board includes a cooling fan that is driven by the +37 VDC. The fan lowers the  
temperature of the PSB/PSE board circuit components, and it also lowers the CR motor temperature  
because the motor locates on the way of an air exhaust channel of the fan.  
Table 2-3. PSB/PSE Board Output DC Voltages  
Voltage  
Board  
Application  
+37V (VP1-GP1)  
+37 V (VP2-GP2)  
+37 V (VP3-GP3)  
C204 DRV-B  
C204 MAIN  
C204 DRV  
Printhead drive ½  
Printhead drive 2/2  
CR motor drive  
PF motor drive  
PG motor drive  
RF motor drive  
HF drive  
CR fan drive  
Plunger drive  
Optional Cutter’s motor drive  
Cooling fan on the PSB/PSE unit  
All logic systems operating voltage  
PF motor hold voltage  
Plunger hold voltage  
PG motor hold voltage  
Power for all the sensors  
Voltage for power system pull-up. It is switched  
by VXCNT signal of the CPU (IC2).  
C204 PSB/PSE  
C204 MAIN  
C204 DRV  
C204 DRV-B  
C204 PNL  
+5 V -GL  
VX-GL  
C204 MAIN  
C204 DRV  
C204 DRV-B  
2-15  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Protection circuits :  
These +37VDC line blocks perform voltage control, and they have over-current limiting and over voltage  
protection circuits for each.  
Control and status signals :  
The PSB//PSE board receives two control signal from the C204 MAIN board and outputs two status signals  
to the MAIN board. Refer to Table 2-3 for the each signal and the printer status relationship.  
Fatal error recovery :  
When the printer detects the fatal error, the PSB/PSE board cannot recover for APPROX.10 minutes by the  
DRERR signal of the C204 MAIN board, after the power is turned off. Therefore, you must wait more than 10  
minutes turn the power on again.  
Table 2-4. PSB/PSE Board Control Signals  
Signal  
In /  
Signal  
Logic  
Function  
Out*1)  
Level  
TTL  
Block 1*2)  
37 VDC  
Block 2*3)  
/PD  
In  
High  
37 VDC, 5 VDC  
37 VDC, 5 VDC  
0 VDC, 0 VDC  
(Power Down)  
Low  
0 VDC  
DRERR  
In  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
High  
0 VDC  
(Head coil/driver error)  
Low  
High  
37 VDC  
37 VDC, 5 VDC  
> 30 VDC, 5VDC  
/SD  
Out  
Out  
(Source Down)  
Indefiniteness  
37 VDC  
Low  
High  
< 30 VDC, 5VDC  
37 VDC, 5 VDC  
CL  
(Current Limit*4)  
Low  
< 35 VDC  
< 35 VDC, 5 VDC  
*1): From the view of the PSB/PSE board.  
*2): VP1-GP1 and VP2-GP2  
*3): VP3-GP3 and +5V-GL  
*4): Due to high duty printing  
2-16  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.3 CONTROL CIRCUIT  
Figure 2-15 shows a block diagram of the control circuit with the C204 MAIN board at the center.  
2.3.1 Control Circuit Operation Overview  
The core of the control circuit is the TMP95C061AF CPU (IC2). This CPU is driven using a 24.57 MHz  
external clock (CRU1). The CPU executes programs stored in the PROM (IC5). The CPU starts executing a  
program upon receiving the reset signal from an external device (IC13) via the gate array E05B36 (IC1). The  
CPU accesses the internal RAM and external RAM (IC14). The CPU also controls the EEPROM (IC11) used  
to store the parameters, such as the tear off position, while the printer is turned off.  
The CPU controls all the printer operations via the peripheral IC E05B36 (IC1) and controls the printer  
mechanism. The main functions of the E05B36 (IC1) are: /CS (Chip Select) signal creation, address  
decoding, printhead driver control, carriage driver control, encoder pulse circuit control, PG and HF phase  
signal creation, interface control, CR and PF motor driver abnormal sensor circuit monitoring, reset signal  
creation, control of the PSB/PSE board, control of the panel unit, and reading the DIP switch settings on the  
C204 SUB board.  
Signals, such as DRERR (driver error) and PD (power down), are connected to the C204 PSB/PSE board to  
provide back-up control of the EEPROM (when the printer is turned off) and control of the power supply  
voltage. When the POFF signal informs the CPU that the power has been turned off (or CL that the power  
supply voltage has dropped), the CPU turns off the power supply voltage of the C204 PSB/PSE board by  
outputting the PD signal.  
The reset circuit outputs the reset signal when the printer is turned on or off, the voltage level drops, or a  
reset signal is input from an external device. It resets the control circuit for a certain period directly or via the  
E05B36.  
2-17  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
MAIN Board  
Mechanism  
CPU  
TMP95C061  
(IC2)  
Cover Open  
Sensor`  
Printhead  
Temperature  
HTMP  
EEPROM  
(IC11)  
Paper Width  
Head Fan  
Temperature  
PWIDTH  
HFTMP  
24.57MHz  
(CRU1)  
Level Converter  
(IC9)  
DRV Board  
TXD/RXD  
POFF  
CR Motor  
Insulation  
CRINS  
RF  
RF Motor  
Drive Circuit  
RF Motor  
PF Motor  
PF Motor  
Drive Circuit (IC2)  
PF  
AB  
DB  
RAM  
(IC14)  
HPSENS,  
HNSENS  
DRV-B Board  
Control  
Printhead  
Drive Circuit 1/2  
Printhead 1/2  
P-ROM  
(IC5)  
Printhead  
Drive Circuit 2/2  
PFA  
HD  
Printhead 2/2  
Interlock SW.  
DTR/CTS  
Optional  
Type-B I/F  
Card  
CR Motor  
Control & Drive  
Circuit (IC1, IC3)  
Current Monitoring  
CRCLM  
CR  
CR Motor  
CR Encoder  
ENCA,  
ENCB  
G/A  
E05B36  
(IC1)  
PG Motor  
Drive Circuit  
PG Motor  
PG  
PG Home  
PGENCA,  
PGENCB  
PG Encoder  
AB  
DB  
PE Signals  
(Front, Rear, Top)  
Paper Jam  
Control  
Ribbon Jam  
Pull Tractor  
CL,  
PD,  
DRERR  
Control &  
Monitoring  
PSB/PSE  
Board  
Tractor Select  
+37 VDC,  
+5 VDC  
PLG  
FAN  
Plunger Drive  
Circuit  
Plunger  
Option  
Cutter  
Fan Drive  
Circuit  
19.55MHz  
(CRU2)  
Fan  
LED,  
SW  
Panel Unit  
Head Fan  
Drive Circuit  
Head Fan  
Reset IC  
(IC13)  
RESET,  
RSTOUT,  
ERRCRPFX  
PDATA1-8,  
/STB,  
/ACK, BUSY  
SWCNT  
SWITCH  
SUB Board  
(DIP SWs)  
Figure 2-15. Control Circuit Block Diagram  
2-18  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
Table 2-5 describes the functions of the main components on the C204 MAIN and C204 DRV board.  
Table 2-5. Main IC Functions  
Board  
IC Name  
Location  
Functions  
C204 MAIN TMP95C061  
(CPU)  
IC2  
Receives data from the host computer via the gate array, loads  
the data to the input buffer in the RAM, and converts the image  
data to print data.  
E05B36  
IC1  
The main features are:  
(Gate Array)  
/CS (Chip Select) signal creation  
Address decoding  
Address latching  
Clock pulse creation  
Printhead driver control  
CR motor driver control  
CR and PG motor pulse encoder I/O (input/output)  
Encoder pulse I/O  
Phase signal creation for the motors  
I/O port control  
Interface control  
Abnormal CR and PF motor detection  
/RESET signal creation  
PROM  
RAM  
IC5  
IC14  
Contains the program that runs the CPU.  
Holds the CPU working area and buffers (input,, line,, and  
image buffers).  
EEPROM  
ADM232  
PST591D  
IC11  
IC9  
IC13  
IC1  
Memorizes the printer unique parameter during the power is off.  
EIA to Logic level voltage level converter  
System reset IC  
C204 DRV  
STK681-050  
Drives the CR motor.  
STK67138MK4 IC2  
uPC393C IC3  
Drives the PF motor.  
Detects the current in the CR motor driver and feeds it back to  
the gate array on the C204 MAIN board.  
2-19  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Figure 2-16 shows the data flow for data input via the parallel interface. Although various circuits perform  
data processing, the control core is the CPU and all operations are executed via the CPU. In this circuit, the  
E05B36 IC (IC1) provides the interface between the external host computer and the CPU, and all data  
processing is performed by read/write operations to MMIO (Memory Mapped Input / Output).  
Data from the host computer is latched by repeating steps 1 through 3 below.  
1. Upon receiving the /STROBE pulse, IC1 latches the data into ports PDATA 1 - 8 and sets the BUSY  
signal to HIGH.  
2. The CPU reads the latched data from the MMIO port, checks whether the data is a print command (CR  
code), and stores it in the input data buffer if it is not.  
3. After checking the data, the CPU makes IC1 clear the BUSY signal and output the /ACKNLG signal, via  
the MMIO accesses. When either a CR code is received or the input data buffer becomes full, the CPU  
sets the BUSY signal to HIGH and executes printing.  
4. The CPU reads the data from the input data buffer, analyzes each byte to determine whether it is a  
character or a command, and converts it to print data. The print data consists of 1-byte character codes  
and 2-byte attributes. Character data is stored as character codes and commands or character types are  
stored as attributes.  
5. The print data is stored in the line buffer in units of one line of data.  
6. The CPU reads the print data stored in the line buffer byte by byte, accesses the CG (Character  
Generator), and expands the data in the image buffer (in the case of download characters, in the  
download CG). A row of expanded data is output to the printhead control circuit as printhead data.  
Note : The data flow from the Type-B I/F card is the same as the data flow from the parallel  
interface, described above, except the signal names and data access method differ.  
E05B36 (IC1)  
CPU (IC2)  
RAM (IC3)  
/STROBE  
DATA  
Input Data Buffer  
1
2
STBINT  
No  
Buffer full ?  
Yes  
CR command ?  
Yes  
DATA  
MMIO  
DATA  
BUSY, /ACK  
3
CPU (IC2)  
4
Command  
Analyzer  
Attribute  
Line Buffer  
5
Character Gnerator  
Down Load  
Image Buffer  
Controls  
printer mechanism.  
6
8
E05B36  
7
Figure 2-16. Parallel Interface Data Flow  
2-20  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.3.2 Reset Circuit  
This section describes the hardware reset circuit. When the hardware reset signal is input, all ICs in the  
control circuit are reset, and the CPU executes the program from the starting address. Figure 2-17 shows the  
reset circuit block diagram.  
The circuit is equipped with a reset IC: PTS591(IC13) is used for resetting the + 5 VDC line. The reset  
operation is described below.  
Power On/Off Reset:  
Reset IC PTS591 (IC13) monitors the +5 VDC line on the C204 MAIN board. If it drops to 4.2 VDC or  
smaller, the reset IC outputs a LOW signal to the CPU (IC2) and E05B36 (IC1) gate array.  
Forced Reset:  
The gate array outputs the RSTOUTX or ERRCRPFX signals to the XRESET of the CPU, and also to the  
gate array itself.  
/INIT Signal Reset:  
When the gate array receives the /INIT signal from the host computer, the signal is transferred to the INT4 of  
the CPU, then CPU performs the /INIT reset operation.  
+5  
R215  
3
VCC  
Type-B,  
Parallel I/F  
/INIT signal  
113  
R218  
C52  
1
VOUT  
/RESETX  
PST591  
(IC13)  
E05B36  
(IC1)  
112  
111  
100  
/RSTOUTX  
INITRQ  
/ERRCRPFX  
30  
36  
INT4  
XRESET  
C56  
CPU  
TMP95C061  
(IC2)  
Figure 2-17. Reset Circuit Block Diagram  
2-21  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
2.3.3 Sensor Circuits  
Figure 2-18 shows the sensor circuits in block diagram form. The printer is equipped with the following  
sensors:  
1. Front and rear PE sensors (use a photo interrupter)  
2. Top PE sensor (to detect the TOF position, uses a photo interrupter)  
3. Paper jam sensor (uses a magnetic transistor)  
4. Tractor select sensor (uses a micro mechanical switch)  
5. Pull tractor sensor (uses a micro mechanical switch)  
6. CR encoder sensor (uses a photo interrupter)  
7. PG encoder sensor (uses a photo interrupter)  
8. PG home sensor (uses a micro mechanical switch)  
9. Ribbon jam sensor (uses a photo interrupter)  
10. Cover open sensor (uses a micro mechanical switch)  
11. Printhead temperature sensor (uses a thermistor)  
12. Head fan temperature sensor (uses a thermistor)  
13. Paper width sensor (uses a photo reflector)  
14. CR motor isolation resistance sensor (monitored by the analog port of the CPU)  
15. PSB/PSE board power off sensor (signal interface)  
CPU  
TMP95C061 (IC2)  
10  
22  
35  
23  
21 20  
8
18  
1
29  
19 22  
CN10 CN14 CN3  
CN1  
3
4
148  
149  
ENCA  
ENCB  
ENCA  
ENCB  
CN4  
CR Encoder  
35  
34  
28  
PGENCA  
PGENCA  
PGENCB  
PG Home  
25  
18  
PGENCB  
PG Home  
36  
19  
28  
29  
TRSEL  
E05B36 (IC1)  
Tractor Select  
Pull Tractor  
20  
21  
22  
PTRCT  
30  
31  
Paper Jam  
Front PE  
PJAM  
FPE  
CN14  
23  
24  
32  
33  
37  
Rear PE  
Top PE  
RPE  
TPE  
29  
RBJAM  
Ribbon Jam  
Figure 2-18. Sensor Circuit Block Diagram  
2-22  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
Each sensor is described below.  
1. Front and rear paper end sensors  
Detection form:  
Output form:  
Logical:  
Photo interrupter  
Open collector (pulled up to 10 K ohms resistor)  
Paper present: LOW  
Paper out: HIGH  
2. Top paper end sensor (to detect the TOF position)  
Detection form:  
Output form:  
Logical:  
Photo reflector  
Open collector  
Paper present: LOW  
Paper out: HIGH  
3. Paper jam sensor  
Detection form:  
Output form:  
Logical:  
Magnetic transistor  
Rectangle wave (1 channel, TTL level)  
Paper feed: Level changes continuously.  
Paper jam: Level remains the same.  
Supplement:  
The magnetic transistor is attached to the tension roller on the paper tension unit.  
4. Tractor select sensor  
Detection form:  
Logical :  
Micro mechanical switch  
Front tractor: LOW (closed)  
Rear tractor: HIGH (open)  
5. Pull tractor sensor  
Detection form:  
Logical :  
Micro mechanical switch  
Pull tractor installed: LOW (closed)  
Pull tractor not installed: HIGH (open)  
6. Carriage encoder sensor  
Detection form:  
Transaction:  
Photo reflector  
Rectangle wave, A and B phases respectively.  
7. Platen Gap encoder sensor  
Detection form:  
Output form:  
PG ability:  
Photo interrupter  
Rectangle wave, 2 channel  
T = 0.015 mm / pulse  
0 < T < 0.7 mm  
Available range:  
8. Platen Gap home position sensor  
Detection form:  
Logical::  
Micro mechanical switch  
Home: LOW (closed)  
Out of home: HIGH (open)  
9. Ribbon jam sensor  
Detection form:  
Photo interrupter  
Function:  
:
The main board monitors signal change during ribbon feed.  
10. Cover open sensor  
Detection form:  
Logical::  
Micro mechanical switch  
Cover closed: LOW  
Cover open: HIGH  
11. Printhead temperature sensor (uses a thermistor)  
The thermistor is included on the printhead.  
12. Head fan temperature sensor (uses a thermistor)  
The thermostor is included on the head fan.  
2-23  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
13. Paper width sensor  
Detection form:  
Output form :  
Photo reflector  
Emitter follower  
Judgemwnt :  
No paper present: Standard voltage level.  
Paper present: The voltage level is double the standard voltage level.  
14. CR motor isolation resistance sensor (monitored by port AN2 of the CPU)  
To provide information about the CR motor life, the analog port (AN2) of the CPU checks the isolation  
resistance every time the printer is turned on. If the isolation resistance is equal or less than 2.2 K ohms, a  
carriage error is detected and the printer beeps.  
15. PSB/PSE Board power off sensor (signal interface)  
When the +37 VDC line voltage drops, the PSB/PSE board sends a HIGH POFF signal to the C204 MAIN  
board.  
2-24  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.3.4 CR Motor Drive Circuit  
Figure 2-19 shows the internal circuit for the CR motor,Table 2-6 provides the CR motor specification, and  
Figure 2-20 shows a block diagram for the CR motor drive circuit.  
An STK681-050 (IC1) bipolar driver IC drives the CR motor. It has built-in bipolar switching transistors and a  
current limiter. A comparator IC uPC393C (IC3) monitors the current in the CR motor driver IC (IC1). If the  
current exceeds the set value, it is fed back to the gate array (E05B36), and then the gate array outputs the  
signal for the current setting transistors (Q5, Q6, and Q7).  
When the printer is turned on, CPU analog port AN2 measures the isolation resistance in the CR motor. If the  
isolation resistance is equal or less than 2.2 K ohms, the printer change the status to the carriage error.  
If the printer cover is open during power on, the CR motor driver power is cut by the interlock switch.  
The ENCA pulse that the carriage encoder outputs is input to general purpose port CRENCA of the gate  
array, and the ENCB pulse that the carriage encoder outputs is input to general purpose port CRENCB of the  
gate array. The gate array counts these pulses using the internal counter and determines the amount and  
direction of motor rotation.  
VP3 (+37 VDC)  
Table 2-6. CR Motor Specifications  
Specification  
Form  
Supply Voltage  
Internal Coil  
Resistance  
Description  
DC servo motor  
37 VDC  
Q1  
Q4  
Q3  
Q2  
Motor  
1.66 ohms (+ 10 %)  
Current  
Consumption*1)  
Accerelation / Deceraration:  
4.6 A (AV.)  
Constant Speed:  
2.5 A (AV.)  
R1  
*1): at Super draft printing, + 10 %  
GP3 (GND)  
Figure 2-19. CR Motor Internal Circuit  
ENCA  
ENCB  
MAIN  
Board  
DRV  
Board  
VX  
VP3  
Interlock SW  
VX  
STK681-050(IC1)  
E05B36 (IC1)  
Carriage Encoder Sensor  
VCC1  
IN_A  
CRAX  
Q16,  
Q34,  
Q35,  
ZD2  
VCC1  
Q17,  
Q18,  
Q19  
IN_B  
CRBX  
CRCX  
CRDX  
IN_C  
CR A  
OUT1  
IN_D  
Carriage  
Motor  
CRCLK  
CLK  
GP  
OUT2  
GP  
CR B  
Vref  
GP3  
Vx  
AIN+  
AIN-  
+5V  
Q5,  
Q6,  
Q7  
Vref  
A OUT  
uPC393C(IC3)  
ZD1  
4.3 V  
CRCLM  
CRINS  
GP3  
CPU  
TMP85C061  
(IC2)  
Partical Pressure  
Circuit  
D3  
AN2  
Figure 2-20. CR Motor Drive Circuit Block Diagram  
2-25  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Table 2-7 lists the CR motor drive modes.  
Table 2-7. CR Motor Drive Modes  
Division  
Drive Mode  
CR Motor Speed  
(rpm)  
Acceleration /  
Deceleration Control  
Curve  
Constant  
Speed  
Control  
Note1)  
Carriage moves  
with printing.  
Note 2)  
Super Draft  
Super Draft HD  
Draft  
2800  
2666  
2100  
2000  
1050  
1050  
1050  
1050  
1000  
888  
Acceleration and  
Deceleration 1  
PI control  
Draft HD  
Bit image 1  
Bit image 2  
Bit image 3  
NLQ  
Acceleration and  
Deceleration 3  
NLQ HD  
Super Draft X 1/3  
Bit image 4  
Draft X 1/3  
933  
666  
Bit image 1 X 1/3  
Bit image 2 X 1/3  
Bit image 3 X 1/3  
NLQ X 1/3  
555  
500  
444  
333  
Draft X 1/6  
333  
Bit image 4 X 1/3  
Bit image 3 X 1/6  
277  
222  
Carriage  
moves Home  
position  
500  
without printing  
Note 3)  
seek  
Paper  
width  
500  
detection seek  
Logical seek 0  
Logical seek 1  
Logical seek 2  
2100  
1050  
333  
-
Measurement seek  
Notes 1: Refer to Table 2-8.  
Notes 2: This division applies to all printing modes. PI control oversees the constant speed. (Refer  
to page 2-27 for more information on PI control.) For increased throughput, the division  
Super Draft to Draft HD allows printing during acceleration and deceleration.  
Notes 3: This division increases throughput when the carriage is moving and the printer is not  
printing.  
The printer has three deceleration control modes. The degree of deceleration is determined by how the CR  
motor transistors are driven. Table 2-8 describes how the transistors are driven for each mode.  
Table 2-8. CR Motor Drive Sequence  
Carriage Transfer Direction  
Driving Mode  
Driver (Refer to Figure 2-19.)  
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
ON  
Q4  
ON  
ON  
Acceleration  
Deceleration 1  
Deceleration 2  
Deceleration 3  
Acceleration  
Deceleration 1  
Deceleration 2  
Deceleration 3  
Left -> Right  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Right -> Left  
ON  
ON  
ON  
2-26  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
PI Control :  
PI control keeps the CR motor speed constant using the encoder pulses ENCA and ENCB with the gate  
array E05B36. The E05B36 generates the PWM (pulse width modulation) signal according to the CR motor  
speed to the PWM port of the gate array and determines the duty of the carriage drive timing.CR ports I0, I1,  
and I2 output the drive signal for the CR motor.  
Acceleration control :  
Until the carriage speed reaches the constant speed set by PI control, acceleration control determines the  
speed of the carriage. The printer can print while the carriage is accelerating. The carriage speed moves to  
constant control speed smoothly to prevent the CR motor from exceeding the constant control speed. The  
E05B36 gate array controls the motor driver (STK681-050), which performs the current chopping. Figure  
2-21 shows the acceleration control curve.  
Speed 0 - SP1  
1. It causes the carriage to accelerate.  
2. Because the control circuit measures time periods with the encoder signal, when the carriage speed  
reaches SP1, it changes to the next sequence (SP1 - SP2).  
SP1 - SP2  
1. When the carriage speed reaches SP1, the printer uses the acceleration driving mode, based on the duty  
data, and the rest of the time, it uses Deceleration driving mode 2.  
2. During this time the control circuit measures time periods using the encoder signal, and controls the  
following:  
When duty data becomes Dutymin before the carriage speed reaches SP2. Then, when the carriage  
speed reaches SP2, the next sequence (SP2-) takes effect.  
When the carriage speed reaches SP2 before duty data becomes Dutymin, the next sequence (SP2-)  
takes effect.  
SP2 -  
When the carriage speed reaches SP2, PI control oversees the carriage speed.  
SPref  
SP2  
SP1  
0
Acceleration  
Constant  
Speed  
Control  
Deceleration 2  
Figure 2-21. CR Motor Drive Circuit Block Diagram  
2-27  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Deceleration control:  
Deceleration control provides smooth deceleration and prevents rapid vibration.  
The duty data for deceleration control is determined for each printing mode. Pulse width modulation (PWM)  
determines each printing mode.  
Current speed - SP3  
1. The printer uses Deceleration driving mode 2, based on the duty data, and the rest of the time, it uses  
Deceleration driving mode 1.  
2. During this time the control circuit measures time periods using the encoder signal, and controls the  
following:  
When duty data becomes Dutymin1 before the carriage speed reaches SP3.  
When the carriage speed reaches SP3 before duty data becomes Dutymin1, the next sequence (SP3 -  
Speed 0) takes effect.  
SP3 - Speed 0  
1. When the carriage speed reaches SP3, Deceleration driving mode 3 takes effect. This control method is  
the inverse-continuity break method.  
2. During this time, the control circuit measures time periods using the encoder signal. When the rising  
edge of next pulse is not detected after 1.5 seconds, Deceleration driving mode 1 takes effect and the  
control circuit controls short-break.  
SPref  
SP3  
0
1
2
3
Deceleration 2  
or  
Deceleration 1  
Deceleration 3  
PWM Perodic Time  
Note: 1, 2, and 3 indicate the PWM control section number.  
Figure 2-22. CR Motor Drive Circuit Block Diagram  
2-28  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.3.5 PF Motor Drive Circuit  
Stepping motor driver STK6713BMK4 (IC2) drives the PF motor. Figure 2-22 shows the PF motor drive  
circuit block diagram, and Table 2-9 provides the PF motor specifications.  
Table 2-9. PF Motor Specifications  
Specification  
Description  
4-phase, 200-pole, HB* pulse motor  
Form  
Supply Voltage  
Internal Coil Resistance  
Frequency  
37 VDC (applied to the drive circuit)  
2.8 ohms + 10 % per phase at 25 oC  
4274 pps** (normal mode,, constant driving): 9.9 ips***  
2610 pps (middle speed mode,, constant driving): 6 ips  
Driving: 1.75 A, + 0.20 A per phase (average)  
Holding: 0.26 A, + 0. 2 A per phase (average)  
Current Consumption  
*HB …. Hybrid  
**pps …. pulses per second  
***ips …. inches per second  
The motor pulse switching signals are transmitted from CPU ports PG00 to PG03. The PF motor is  
controlled using open-loop phase switching based on the specified time data, and the phase driving method  
is 1-2 phase excitation. (When the PF motor is held, the phase driving method is 1 phase excitation.) The  
CPU selects the most suitable driving mode from the modes below according to conditions such as the  
paper feed length and the pull tractor condition.  
Micro feed (adjust) mode : < 20 / 432 inches  
Middle speed mode:  
Normal speed mode:  
> 20 / 432 inches and < 60 / 432 inches, or with optional pull tractor  
> 60 / 432 inches  
Each phase switching FET in driver IC2 is an open collector. When the phase switching data is HIGH, the  
motor is turned on. The PFA port of the gate array monitors the phase A signal of the PF motor and checks  
whether it is operating normally. The PFA port is used as the WDT (watch dog timer).  
If PF motor operation is abnormal, the gate array outputs the /RSTOUT (reset request) signal to the system  
reset IC (IC13). Refer to Section 2.3.2 Reset Circuit.  
MAIN  
Board  
DRV  
Board  
Gate Array  
E05B36 (IC1)  
+5V  
Ref. Voltage  
PFH/R  
Setting Circuit (Q9)  
Vref  
PFA  
4.3 VDC  
CPU TMP95C061A  
(IC2)  
GP3  
VP3  
PG00  
PG01  
PG02  
PG03  
IN_A  
INXA  
IN_B  
INXB  
STK6713B  
(IC2)  
PF COM  
OUT_A  
OUTXA  
PF A  
PF B  
OUT_B  
OUTXB  
PF C  
PF D  
GP3  
Figure 2-23. PF Motor Drive Circuit Block Diagram  
2-29  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
2.3.6 RF Motor Drive Circuit  
Figure 2-24 shows a block diagram of the RF motor drive circuit, and Table 2-10 provides the RF motor  
specifications. The RF motor is a stepping motor. The control circuit performs open-loop phase switching  
control according to the timing data for acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration. CPU ports PG10 to  
PG13 output the motor phase switching signals. The control method is not equipped with a hold circuit for  
changing the motor phase. The RF motor rotates when the carriage moves.  
Table 2-10. RF Motor Specifications  
Specification  
Description  
4-phase, 48-pole, PM pulse motor  
Form  
Supply Voltage  
Internal Coil Resistance  
Frequency  
37 VDC (applied to the drive circuit)  
150 ohms + 10 % per phase at 25 oC  
720 pps  
Current Consumption  
Driving Method  
Driving: 0.10 A (average)  
Constant voltage driving, 2-2 phase drive  
VP 3  
MAIN  
Board  
DRV  
Board  
F1  
E05B36  
(IC1)  
RFCOM  
Q20,Q21  
RF COM  
Q22  
Q23  
RF A  
RF B  
RF C  
RF D  
PG10  
PG11  
RF Motor  
TMP95C061A  
(IC2)  
Q24  
Q25  
PG12  
PG13  
PNP Transistor x4  
Figure 2-24. RF Motor Drive Circuit Block Diagram  
2-30  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.3.7 PG Motor Drive Circuit  
Figure 2-25 shows a block diagram of the PG motor drive circuit, and Table 2-11 provides PG motor  
specifications.  
The PG motor is a stepping motor. The motor phase switching signals are output from the E05B36 ports  
PGA to PGD. The motor common voltage (PGCOM) alternates between drive mode (+37 VDC) and hold  
mode (+5 VDC) using the PG H/R signal of E05B36. The phase driver circuit is made by discrete transistors  
Q12 to Q15.  
The phase A output pulse from the platen gap encoder (ENCA) is input to port ENCA of E05B36 and the  
phase B output pulse from the platen gap encoder (ENCB) is input to port ENCB of E05B36. The E05B36  
counts these pulses using the internal counter and determines the amount and direction of motor rotation.  
Table 2-11. PG Motor Specifications  
Specification  
Description  
Form  
4-phase, 48-pole, PM pulse motor  
37 VDC (applied to the drive circuit)  
250 + 18 ohms per phase at 25 oC  
Driving: 0.20 A (average)  
Holding: 0.02 A + 5 mA  
Supply Voltage  
Internal Coil Resistance  
Current Consumption  
Frequency  
285 pps  
Driving Method  
Constant voltage driving, 2-2 phase drive  
MAIN Board  
DRV Board  
VP 3  
+5V  
D10  
F2  
E05B36  
(IC1)  
Q10,  
Q11  
PG H/R  
Q12,  
Q13,  
Q14.  
Q15  
PG A  
PG B  
PG C  
PG D  
Plsten Gap  
Encoder  
PG Motor  
Figure 2-25. PG Motor Drive Circuit Block Diagram  
2-31  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
2.3.8 Plunger Drive Circuit  
Figure 2-26 shows a block diagram of the plunger drive circuit, Table 2-12 provides the plunger specification,  
and Table 2-13 provides the plunger switching pattern.  
The plunger is driven using three switching patterns. Gate array E05B26 ports PLP and PLN output the  
plunger coil drive signals. When the PNP port of the gate array turns on switching transistors Q30 and Q31  
are turned on and the supply voltage (VP3) flows into the plunger coil. When switching transistor Q30 is  
turned off, Q31 is turned off and the hold voltage (+5 V) flows into the plunger coil via Q32, using the port  
PLN of the E05B36.  
Table 2-12. Plunger Specifications  
Specification  
Description  
Form  
DC solenoid  
Supply Voltage  
Internal Coil Resistance  
Current Consumption  
37 VDC (applied to the drive circuit)  
9 ohms + 5 % at 25 oC  
Driving: 3.7 A (MAX.)  
Holding: 0.4 A  
Table 2-13. Plunger Switching Pattern  
Suspension Roller Status  
Closed  
Closed -> Opened  
Closed with holding voltage  
Q30 and Q31  
Q32  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
VP 3  
F3  
NPN  
Q30  
Q31  
PNP  
C
E05B36  
(IC1)  
PLP  
B
C
E
B
E
C
B
Q32  
GP3  
Figure 2-26. Plunger Drive Circuit Block Diagram  
2-32  
Rev. B  
OPERATING PRINCIPLES  
2.3.9 Printhead Drive Circuit  
Figure 2-27 shows a printhead drive circuit block diagram.  
General :  
The print data lines from IC1 are active when they are HIGH. When ports HDR1 (HDL1) to HDR9 (HDL9)  
of IC1 go HIGH, the FET gates are biased, and the FETs are turned on to apply the current to the  
printhead coil. At the same time, ports HDRS1 (HDLS1) to HDRS9 (HDLS9) of IC1 go HIGH, the FET  
gates are biased, and the FETs are turned on because the each printhead coil is driven by bipolar drive  
method. When the HD port of IC1 goes LOW, the FET is turned off and the printhead coil current is cut.  
Two +37 VDC lines (VP1-GP1 on the C204 DRV-B board and VP2-GP2 on the C204 MAIN board) assign  
the common voltage for the printhead coil. Pins #1, #2, #7, #9, #10, #11, #12, #16, and #17 are supplied  
by the VP2-GP2 line (CN1 on the C204 MAIN board). Pins #3, #4, #5, #6 #8, #13, #14, #15, and #18 are  
supplied by the VP1-GP1 line (CN1 on the C204 DRV-B board).  
The CPU monitors the printhead temperature and head fan (HF) temperature. When the temperature  
rises abnormally, printing stops at once until the temperature cools.  
The CPU also monitors the printhead driver status, P-channel and N-channel FET respectively. If the  
printhead driver FET shorts, CPU (IC2) port PDRERR (P-channel) / NDRERR (N-channel) detects HIGH  
level and the E05B36 (IC1) sends the DRERR (Driver Error) signal to the C204 PSB/PSE board. When  
the C204 PSB/PSE board receives this signal, it stops the output voltage and the printer beeps.  
MAIN Board  
FTMP  
HF Motor Thermistor  
HFANA  
FANA  
HF Motor  
E05B36 (IC1)  
HFANB  
FANAX  
TMP95C061A  
(IC2)  
VX VP1 GP1  
VX VP2 GP2  
Printhead Driver Circuit  
1/2  
Printhead Coils 1/2  
DRV-B Board  
Printhead Driver  
Circuit 2/2  
Printhead Coils 2/2  
HTMP  
VP2  
HPSENS  
Printhead Thermistor  
R100  
Monitoring NPNs  
Short Circuit  
Monitoring PNPs  
Short Circuit  
R101  
ZD4  
5.1V  
ZD1  
24V  
R98  
GP2  
R99  
GP2  
Figure 2-27. Printhead Drive Circuit Block Diagram  
2-33  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Printhead high temperature feedback operation :  
The printer supports the printhead temperature detection sequence, which consists of the following steps:  
1. When the printhead temperature is less than 110 oC, the printer performs normal printing.  
2. When the printhead temperature exceeds equal or more than 110 oC, the printer performs interval printing  
(Carriage rest time at the sides is little bit longer than the normal.)  
o
3. When the printhead temperature exceeds equal or more than 120 C, the printer stops printing until the  
temperature goes down to 100 oC or less.  
4. When the printhead temperature returns less than 100 oC, the printer performs normal printing again.  
HF temperature feedback operation :  
The printer supports the printhead fan (HF) temperature detection sequence, which consists of the following  
steps:  
1. When the printhead fan temperature is less than 65 oC, the HF fan stops.  
2. When the printhead fan temperature exceeds equal or more than 65 oC, the HF rotates.  
o
3. When the printhead temperature goes down to 50 C or less, the HF stops again.  
2-34  
Rev. B  
CHAPTER 3  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................3-1  
3.1.1 Precautions for Disassembly and Assembly....................................................................... 3-1  
3.1.2 Tools ........................................................................................................................................ 3-3  
3.1.3 Specification for Screws........................................................................................................ 3-5  
3.1.4 Service Checks After Repair.................................................................................................. 3-6  
3.2 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY.........................................................................3-7  
3.2.1 ROM Replacement.................................................................................................................. 3-8  
3.2.2 Printhead and Ribbon Mask Assembly Removal ................................................................ 3-9  
3.2.3 Housing Removal ................................................................................................................. 3-13  
3.2.3.1 Top Cover Removal................................................................................................. 3-13  
3.2.3.2 Left, Right, and Front Covers Removal and Fuse Replacement............................. 3-14  
3.2.3.3 Front Panel Unit Removal ....................................................................................... 3-16  
3.2.3.4 Upper Case Removal.............................................................................................. 3-17  
3.2.4 Circuit Boards Removal....................................................................................................... 3-18  
3.2.4.1 Bottom Panel Assembly Removal........................................................................... 3-18  
3.2.4.2 Cooling Fan and C204 Power Supply Board Unit Removal .................................... 3-21  
3.2.4.3 C204 SUB Board Unit Removal .............................................................................. 3-22  
3.2.4.4 C204 DRV-B and C204 DRV Board Units Removal ............................................... 3-23  
3.2.4.5 C204 MAIN Board Unit Removal............................................................................. 3-24  
3.2.4.6 AC Inlet Removal .................................................................................................... 3-26  
3.2.4.7 C204 PNL Board Removal...................................................................................... 3-27  
3.2.5 Interlock Switch and Cover Open Sensor Assembly Removal........................................ 3-28  
3.2.6 Printer Mechanism Removal................................................................................................ 3-29  
3.2.6.1 Fan Removal........................................................................................................... 3-31  
3.2.6.2 Ribbon Feed Change Lever Unit Removal.............................................................. 3-32  
3.2.6.3 Tractor Select Lever (Upper and Lower) Assembly Disassembly........................... 3-34  
3.2.6.4 Ribbon Jam Sensor Removal.................................................................................. 3-35  
3.2.6.5 Connector Junction Board Assembly and FPC Board Assembly Removal............. 3-36  
3.2.6.6 PG Sensor and PG Motor Removal ........................................................................ 3-37  
3.2.6.7 Plunger and Paper Bail Assembly Removal............................................................ 3-38  
3.2.6.8 Upper Paper Guide and Top PE Sensor Removal .................................................. 3-40  
3.2.6.9 Tension Roller Shaft Removal................................................................................. 3-41  
3.2.6.10 Platen Removal ..................................................................................................... 3-43  
3.2.6.11 Paper Jam Sensor Removal.................................................................................. 3-44  
3.2.6.12 Pull Tractor Sensor Removal................................................................................. 3-45  
3.2.6.13 Paper Width (PW) Sensor Removal ..................................................................... 3-46  
3.2.6.14 PG Home Sensor Removal.................................................................................... 3-47  
3.2.6.15 PF Motor Removal ................................................................................................. 3-49  
3.2.6.16 Left Side Frame Gear Removal ............................................................................ 3-50  
3.2.6.17 Front Tractor Assembly Removal ........................................................................... 3-51  
3.2.6.18 Rear Tractor Assembly Removal .......................................................................... 3-52  
3.2.6.19 CR Motor Fan Removal.......................................................................................... 3-53  
3.2.6.20 CR Motor Removal................................................................................................. 3-54  
3.2.6.21 CR (Carriage Encoder) Sensor Removal.............................................................. 3-55  
3.2.6.22 Carriage Mechanism Disassembly........................................................................ 3-56  
3.2.6.23 Paper Support Assembly Removal ........................................................................ 3-59  
3.2.6.24 PF Drive Roller Removal ....................................................................................... 3-60  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.1 OVERVIEW  
This chapter describes the disassembly/assembly procedures to be used for replacing the main  
assemblies of the DFX-8500.  
3.1.1 Precautions for Disassembly and Assembly  
Read this section before you disassemble, assemble, or transport the printer.  
WARNING  
;Because the DFX-8500 weighs 29.0 kg (63.8 lb) and is much larger and heavier than most printers,  
you must be careful when handling it. Whenever it needs to be moved, two or more persons must  
carry it, supporting it from the bottom. Never lift the printer by holding the front cover, because it may  
come off.  
;Disconnect the power cord before disassembling or assembling the printer.  
;Disconnect the interface cable before disassembling or assembling the printer.  
;The printhead reaches very high temperatures, and if you place your hand on it, it could burn you.  
Always be sure that the printhead is cool coot when you handle it.  
;Wear gloves to protect your hands when handling the printer.  
CAUTION  
;Handle frame edges with care since this printer has a considerable amount of metal materials.  
;To prevent damage to ICs from static electricity, do not touch the ICs on the circuit board or the  
terminals of peripheral electrical components with your hands.  
;Use only the recommended tools to ensure safe and efficient maintenance work. Inappropriate  
tools may damage the printer.  
;This printer must be properly packed in the correct container for transportation as described on  
next page. If the unit is not properly packed, it could be damaged during transportation.  
;The paper and ribbon cartridge should be removed before transportation or disassembly.  
;Because you may need to turn the printer while you disassemble or assemble it, place it on a clean,  
thick cloth, such as a blanket, before starting  
;After finishing the assembly, do not forget to lubricate and reassemble the unit following the  
instructions in CHAPTER 6, because a considerable amount of oil may be removed during  
maintenance or repair work. Also, be sure to clean the unit as described in CHAPTER 6.  
3-1  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Before transporting the printer, remove the paper and ribbon cartridge. Then attach the following packing  
materials, as shown in Figure 3-1:  
Transport locking bracket  
Carriage guide shaft support bar  
Printhead protector  
Foam packing for paper bail  
Figure 3-1. Packing Material Attaching  
After attaching the packing materials, pack the printer in its container as shown in Figure 3-2.  
Figure 3-2. DFX-8500 Packing  
Rev. B  
3-2  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.1.2 Tools  
This section describes the tools required for assembling, disassembling, or adjusting the printer.  
Note : Refer to CHAPTER 4 for adjustment tools, CHAPTER 5 for troubleshooting tools, and  
CHAPTER 6 for tools for maintenance, lubrication, and adhesives.  
Table 3-1. Recommended Tools  
Tool  
Type  
Class  
Code  
Reference  
(+) Driver No.2  
o
A
B743800200  
-
(20 mm or more shaft length with  
magnetization is recommended.)  
(+) Driver No.1  
Box screw driver (7 mm / 0.28 inches  
across)  
o
o
A
A
B743800400  
B741700200  
-
-
E-ring holder No. 3  
E-ring holder No. 6  
Round nose pliers  
Diagonal wire cutters  
Tweezers  
Electric soldering iron  
Tension gauge (7000 g)  
Tension gauge (200 g)  
Lift handles #E656  
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
E
E
E
E
o
o
o
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B740800500  
B740800800  
B740400100  
B740500100  
B741000100  
B740200100  
B777200301  
B765114601  
B765111001  
B101946600  
B101946700  
B101946800  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Dial gauges #F610  
Figure 3-3  
Figure 3-4  
Figure 3-5  
Figure 3-6  
-
Dial gauge base #F611  
Dial gauge master #F612  
Thickness gauge (t=0.43mm)  
Thickness gauge (t=0.80mm)  
Motor screwdriver  
-
-
-
(Phillips head, torque adjustable)  
o: Commercially available  
E: EPSON exclusive  
A: Mandatory  
B: Recommended  
3-3  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
P
E
A
C
O
C
K
P
E
A
C
O
C
K
Figure 3-3. Dial Gauges  
Figure 3-4. Dial Gauge Base  
Figure 3-5. Thickness Gauge  
Figure 3-6. Dial Gauge Master  
Rev. B  
3-4  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.1.3 Specification for Screws  
In the following sections, abbreviations are used for small parts such as screws and washers. Table 3-2  
lists these abbreviations. Table 3-3 lists screw and washer types.  
Table 3-2. Screw Abbreviations  
Abbreviation  
Part Name  
CBB  
Cross-Bind head,, B-tight screw  
CBS (O)  
CBS (SP)  
CFS  
Cross-Bind head,, S-tight screw with Outside-toothed lock washer  
Cross-Bind head,, S-tight screw with Spring lock washer + Plane washer  
Cross-Flat head,, S-tight screw  
CP (SP)  
CP (PS)  
CPB  
Cross-Pan head with Spring lock washer + Plane washer  
Cross-Pan head with Plane washer + Spring lock washer  
Cross-Pan head B-tight screw  
CPB (O)  
CPS  
Cross-Pan head B-tight screw with Outside toothed lock washer  
Cross-Pan head S-tight screw  
CPS (P)  
CPS (SP)  
CPN  
Cross-Pan head S-tight screw with Plain washer  
Cross-Pan head S-tight screw with Spring lock washer + Plain washer  
Cross-Pan head screw  
CPN (O)  
CPN (SP)  
CPT (O)  
Cross-Pan head screw with Outside toothed lock washer  
Cross-Pan head screw with Spring lock washer + Plain washer  
Cross-Pan head Tapping screw with Outside toothed lock washer  
Table 3-3. Screw Names and Illustrations  
3-5  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.1.4 Service Checks After Repair  
Before returning the printer after service, use the check list in Table 3-4, which provides a record to make  
servicing and shipping more efficient.  
Table 3-4. Inspection Check List for the Repaired Printer  
Category  
Item to check  
Is Check required?  
Maintenance Are all necessary adjustments completed? Are [ ] Checked [ ] Not necessary  
the results of the adjustments within the  
specified tolerances? (Refer to CHAPTER 4.)  
Check that lubrication and adhesion are correct. [ ] Checked [ ] Not necessary  
(Refer to CHAPTER 6.)  
Operation  
At the operate switch turns on, does the printer [ ] Checked [ ] Not necessary  
perform power-on initialization correctly ?  
Does the printer work exactly with using the  
attached utility program?  
ROM Grade- What it the ROM version up-dated?  
up  
[ ] Checked [ ] Not necessary  
[ ] Checked [ ] Not necessary  
[ ] Checked [ ] Not necessary  
Cleaning  
Is any dust removed from the inside of the  
printer?  
Is the exterior housing clean?  
Is the operate switch turned off?  
Is the ribbon cartridge removed?  
Attachments (power cord, optional units, etc.)  
are inserted?  
[ ] Checked [ ] Not necessary  
[ ] Checked [ ] Not necessary  
[ ] Checked [ ] Not necessary  
[ ] Checked [ ] Not necessary  
Return to  
customer  
Attached  
goods  
Rev. B  
3-6  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
WARNING  
;Before you disassemble or assemble the printer, be sure to read and follow the instructions in  
Section 3.1, "OVERVIEW."  
;Before you disassemble the printer, be sure to turn the printer power off and disconnect AC cable.  
This section describes how to disassemble the printer. See the APPENDIX for an exploded diagram of the  
printer. Use this diagram for simple disassembly procedures not described here. To assemble the printer,  
follow the disassembly instructions in this chapter in reverse. Any extra information you need to assemble  
printer components is provided in notes labeled “ASSEMBLING POINT.” Adjustments required before  
assembly are described in notes labeled “ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED.” Be sure to follow the instructions in  
these notes.  
3-7  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.1 ROM Replacement  
CAUTION  
;It is best to remove the top cover before you tilt back the printer as described in the steps below.  
Refer to Section 3.2.3.1 for instructions on removing the top cover.  
;If you tilt back the printer with the top cover attached, be careful not to put too much weight on the top  
cover or any other printer components.  
;Spread a thick, soft cloth under the printer before you follow the steps below.  
;Remove the ROM carefully to avoid damaging the board.  
;Before you install a new ROM, check the INDEX mark on the socket to be sure the ROM is oriented  
correctly. Insert the ROM carefully to avoid damaging the ROM pins and the board.  
;When transporting the printer a long distance, pack it using the original packing material.  
Step 1: Tilt back the printer and lay it on its back. Hold the top cover closed if it is not removed.  
Step 2: Remove the CBB (M3x10) screw securing the ROM cover, remove the cover, and replace the  
ROM using the ROM holder.  
C
B
B
(
M
3
X
1
0
)
Figure 3-7. ROM Replacement  
Rev. B  
3-8  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.2 Printhead and Ribbon Mask Assembly Removal  
The printhead can be changed without disassembling the entire unit.  
Use the exclusive printhead kit for printhead exchange on the DFX-8500. When you receive the kit, check  
that all of the following are included.  
P
r
i
n
t
h
e
a
d
U
n
i
t
O
i
l
(
O
-
2
)
H
e
a
d
C
a
b
l
e
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
h
e
e
t
R
i
b
b
o
n
M
a
s
k
A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
Figure 3-8. Printhead Kit  
The description hereafter is the same as the above instruction Manual, so you may refer to this section or  
to the Instruction Manual.  
3-9  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
CAUTION  
;When you remove the connector cover, be careful not to break the tabs.  
;When you remove the printhead cable holder, be careful not to break the printhead holder latch. Use  
a slotted screwdriver if necessary.  
Step 1: Open the top cover and remove the ribbon cartridge.  
Step 2: Remove the two CBS (M3x8) screws securing the FPC cover to the bottom plate of the printer  
mechanism.  
Step 3: Disconnect the three printhead cables and a ground cable from the FPC board on the bottom plate.  
Note 1. When disconnect the cables, hold the cable close to the connector.  
Note 2. When disconnect the cable, hold the connector to prevent it from being pulled off the board.  
Note 3. When disconnect the cable, pull it slowly and horizontally to the right, as viewed from the  
front side.  
C
B
S
(
M
3
X
8
)
F
P
C
C
o
v
e
r
P
r
i
n
t
h
e
a
d
C
a
b
F
P
C
B
o
a
r
d
Figure 3-9. Ribbon Cartridge Removal  
Figure 3-10. Head Cable Removal  
Step 4: Unlock the two head cable cover latches by pressing them with your fingers, then remove the  
cover by sliding it to the right. Remove the cable protection sheet, too.  
Figure 3-11. Head Cable Cover Removal  
Rev. B  
3-10  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
Step 5:Disconnect the narrow FPC cable from white connector (lock-type).  
Step 6:Move the carriage to around 90th column, remove the two CP(S-P1)(M4X7) screws securing the  
printhead and remove the CP(S-P1)(M3X6) screw securing the ground FPC, then remove the  
printhead.  
C
P
(
S
-
P
1
)
(
M
4
X
7
)
N
a
r
r
o
w
F
P
C
C
a
b
l
e
C
P
(
S
-
P
1
)
(
M
3
X
6
)
P
r
i
n
t
h
e
a
d
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
Figure 3-12. Printhead Removal  
Step 7: Disconnect the white connector for the paper width (PW) sensor on the ribbon mask.  
Step 8: Remove the two shafts securing the ribbon mask to the carriage using a hexagon head screw  
wrench, then remove the ribbon mask.  
S
h
a
f
t
s
R
M
i
b
b
o
n
a
s
k
P
C
W
S
e
n
s
o
r
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
Figure 3-13. Ribbon Mask Removal  
Step 9: Install the new printhead, ribbon mask, and cable protection sheet by following Steps1 to 9 in the  
reverse order.  
Step 10: Replace the ribbon mask with a new one. Set the cable of the paper width sensor as shown in  
Figure 3-13. After installation, check that the ribbon mask is a little loose.  
Step 11: Install the new printhead (torque the screws to 12 + 1 kg cm). Replace the head cable protection  
sheet with a new one, then connect the head cables to the connector.  
3-11  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
ASSEMBLING POINT  
zꢀ Confirm that the cables are connected correctly. (Refer to Figures 3-12 and 5-3..)  
zꢀ Tighten the screws while pulling the printhead as shown below to secure the printhead firmly.  
Figure 3-14. Printhead Installation  
Step 12:Install the cable cover and the FPC cover.  
Step 13:Wipe off any stains from the carriage guide shaft, lubricate both ends of the carriage guide shaft  
with the included oil (0-2), and spread the oil over the shaft by moving the carriage manually.  
Figure 3-15. Lubricating to Carriage Guide Shafts  
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED  
zꢀ When you install the printhead, perform the platen gap motor value adjustment (ALPHA value write  
operation) described in Section 4.1.7).  
Rev. B  
3-12  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.3 Housing Removal  
This section describes how to remove the housing.  
3.2.3.1 Top Cover Removal  
CAUTION  
;Two people are required to remove the top cover; one person must hold the top cover while the other  
person removes the screws. If the top cover is not supported while the screws are removed, the  
weight of the top cover may damage the rear hinges.  
Step 1: Open the top cover.  
Step 2: While someone supports the top cover, remove the four screws (two on the right and two on the  
left) securing the top cover to the hinges and remove the cover.  
T
o
p
C
o
v
e
r
Figure 3-16. Top Cover Removal  
3-13  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.3.2 Left, Right, and Front Covers Removal and Fuse Replacement  
Step 1: Remove the four CBB (M4x16) screws securing the left side cover and remove the cover.  
Step 2: Remove the right side cover in the same way as you removed the left side cover. Also remove the  
four cables from the main switch on the right side cover.  
C
B
B
(
M
4
X
1
6
)
C
B
B
(
M
4
X
1
6
)
C
B
B
(
M
4
X
1
6
)
C
B
B
(
M
4
X
1
6
)
R
i
g
h
t
a
n
d
L
e
f
t
C
o
v
e
r
s
Figure 3-17. Left and Right Side Covers Removal  
ASSEMBLING POINT  
zꢀ When you attach the right side cover, connect the cable from connector CN1 on the C204 power  
supply board unit and the cable from the AC inlet to the main switch on the right side cover, as  
shown below.  
R
t
e
v
e
r
s
e
s
i
d
e
o
f
h
e
s
i
d
e
c
o
v
e
r
(
R
)
M
a
i
n
S
w
i
t
c
h
M
a
g
n
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
A
C
I
n
l
e
t
S
e
t
B
r
o
w
n
c
a
b
l
e
B
B
r
l
o
w
n
c
a
b
l
e
C
S
2
0
4
P
o
w
e
r
1
1
1
2
u
p
p
l
y
B
o
a
r
d
B
l
u
e
c
a
b
l
e
2
4
2
5
u
e
c
a
b
l
e
Figure 3-18. Cabling for the Main Switch  
Rev. B  
3-14  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
Step 3: After you remove the right side cover, you can replace the input fuse for the C204 power supply  
board unit.  
WARNING  
;Make sure the new fuse meets the printer's AC power specifications.  
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
M
o
t
o
r
G
r
o
u
n
d
i
n
g
H
a
r
n
e
s
F
u
s
e
C
N
1
C
2
0
4
P
S
B
/
P
S
E
B
o
a
r
d
(
R
i
g
h
t
S
i
d
e
)
Figure 3-19. Fuse Removal  
Step 4: Remove the three CBB (M4x16) screws securing the left side of the front cover to the lower cover.  
Then remove the front cover along the left hinge.  
C
B
B
(
M
4
X
1
6
)
F
r
o
n
t
C
o
v
e
r
Figure 3-20. Front Cover Removal  
3-15  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.3.3 Front Panel Unit Removal  
Step 1: Remove the left and right side covers. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.2)  
Step 2: Open the top cover and disconnect connector CN5 (the panel unit connector).  
Step 3: Remove the two CBB (M4x16) screws from the front panel unit and remove the panel unit along  
with the panel connector cable.  
F
r
o
n
t
P
a
n
e
l
U
n
i
t
C
B
B
(
M
4
X
1
6
)
Figure 3-21. Front Panel Removal  
Rev. B  
3-16  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.3.4 Upper Case Removal  
Step 1: Remove the front panel unit. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.3)  
Step 2: Remove the six CBB (M4x16) screws, and two CBB (M3x10) screws from the upper case. Then  
remove the upper case.  
C
B
B
(
M
4
X
1
6
)
U
p
p
e
r
C
a
s
e
C
B
B
(
M
3
X
1
0
)
Figure 3-22. Upper Case Removal  
3-17  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.4 Circuit Boards Removal  
This section describes how to remove the circuit boards.  
3.2.4.1 Bottom Panel Assembly Removal  
CAUTION  
;It is best to remove the top cover before you tilt back the printer as described in the steps below.  
Refer to Section 3.2.3.1 for instructions on removing the top cover.  
;If you tilt back the printer with the top cover attached, be careful not to put too much weight on the top  
cover or any other printer components.  
;Spread a thick, soft cloth under the printer before you follow the steps below.  
;When you attach the bottom panel, make sure the parallel interface cable latch is not caught  
between the lower case and bottom panel.  
Step 1: Remove the left and right side covers. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.2)  
Step 2: On the right side of the printer mechanism, remove the CBS (O) screw securing the green and  
yellow earth cable and the earth plate together.  
E
a
r
t
h
C
a
b
l
e
C
B
S
(
O
)
S
c
r
e
w
(
M
4
x
8
)
C
B
2
0
4
P
S
B
/
P
S
E
o
a
r
d
B
A
o
s
t
t
o
m
P
a
n
e
l
s
e
m
b
l
y
(
R
i
g
h
t
s
i
d
e
)
Figure 3-23. Connector and Earth Cable Removal (right side)  
Rev. B  
3-18  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
Step 3: From the left side, remove the two CPB(O)(M4X8) screws securing the green and yellow earth  
cables between the bottom plate of the printer mechanism and the earth on the bottom panel  
assembly.  
Step 4: Disconnect the 6 connectors, (1) through (6) as shown in Figure 3-24.  
4
1
6
E
a
r
t
h
C
5
a
b
l
e
3
2
E
a
r
t
h
C
a
b
l
e
F
C
C
F
C
C
l
l
a
a
t
t
C
C
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
C
C
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
o
o
r
r
(
(
5
5
0
0
-
-
p
p
i
i
n
n
)
)
:
:
1
2
3
N
N
4
9
(
(
4
7
-
-
p
p
i
i
n
n
)
)
:
:
4
5
N
N
3
5
(
(
2
1
-
4
p
i
p
n
)
n
:
6
-
i
)
:
Figure 3-24. Connector and Earth Cable Removal (left side)  
Step 5: Open the rear cover. Remove the four CBB (M3x12) screws and two CB(M3x12) screws securing  
the interface cover and remove the cover.  
Step 6: Remove the 2 CB(M3x12) screws securing the optional interface cover and remove the cover.  
C
B
(
M
3
X
1
2
)
O
I
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
C
o
v
e
r
I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
C
o
v
e
r
C
B
B
(
M
3
X
1
R
e
a
r
C
o
v
e
r
Figure 3-25. Interface Cover Removal  
3-19  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Step 7: While supporting the top cover to protect it from scratches, tilt back the printer and lay it on its back.  
Step 8: Remove the eight CBB (M4x16) screws securing the bottom panel assembly, and slowly remove the  
bottom panel unit assembly.  
C
B
B
(
M
4
X
1
6
)
Figure 3-26. Bottom Panel Assembly Removal  
Rev. B  
3-20  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.4.2 Cooling Fan and C204 Power Supply Board Unit Removal  
Step 1: Remove the bottom panel assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.4.1)  
Step 2: If you need to remove the cooling fan, disconnect connector CN5 and remove the four CCN (M3x30)  
screws securing it, and remove the fan.  
Step 3: Disconnect connectors CN2, CN3, and CN4.  
Step 4: Remove the six CBB (M3x12) screws and CPN (O) (M3x8) screw securing the C204 power supply  
board unit and remove the board.  
C
B
B
(
M
3
X
1
2
)
C
N
5
C
N
3
C
N
2
C
N
1
C
B
2
0
4
P
S
B
/
P
S
E
o
a
r
d
C
B
2
0
4
M
A
I
N
o
a
r
d
C
N
4
A
C
I
n
l
e
t
S
e
t
C
P
N
(
O
)
(
M
3
X
8
)
C
C
N
(
M
3
X
3
0
)
Figure 3-27. C204 PSE/PSB Board Removal  
3-21  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.4.3 C204 SUB Board Unit Removal  
Step 1: Remove the bottom panel assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.4.1)  
Step 2: Disconnect connectors CN15 and CN16 on the C204 MAIN board.  
Step 3: Remove the CBB (M3x8) screw and the CBB (M3x12) screw securing the C204 SUB board  
assembly and remove the board.  
C
2
0
4
S
U
B
B
o
a
r
d
U
n
i
t
C
B
B
(
M
3
X
8
)
C
B
B
(
M
3
X
1
2
)
C
N
1
6
C
N
1
5
C
N
1
5
C
N
1
6
C
2
0
4
M
A
I
N
B
o
a
r
d
Figure 3-28. C204 SUB Board Unit Removal  
Rev. B  
3-22  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.4.4 C204 DRV-B and C204 DRV Board Units Removal  
Step 1: Remove the bottom panel assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.4.1)  
Step 2: Disconnect connector CN3 and cable connector CN14 for the C204 DRV board.  
Step 3: Disconnect connectors CN1 and CN2 on the C204 DRV-B board.  
C
2
0
4
D
B
R
V
B
o
a
r
d
C
2
0
4
D
R
V
-
B
o
a
r
d
C
N
3
C
N
1
4
C
N
1
C
N
2
C
2
0
4
M
A
I
N
b
o
a
r
d
C
a
b
l
e
(
f
r
o
m
C
2
0
4
M
A
I
Figure 3-29. C204 DRV/DRV-B Boards Removal ½  
Step 4: Remove the eight CBS (M3x8) screws securing the C204 DRV-B board and C204 DRV board via  
shielding plate respectively.  
:
C
B
S
(
M
3
X
8
)
X
8
S
h
i
e
l
d
i
n
g
P
l
a
t
S
h
i
e
l
d
i
n
g
P
l
a
t
e
C
2
0
4
D
R
V
B
o
a
C
2
0
4
D
R
V
-
B
B
o
a
r
d
Figure 3-30. C204 DRV/DRV-B Boards Removal 2/2  
3-23  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.4.5 C204 MAIN Board Unit Removal  
Step 1:Remove the bottom panel assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.4.1)  
Step 2:Remove the C204 SUB board unit (Refer to Section 3.2.4.3.)  
Step 3:Remove the C204 DRV-B board and C204 DRV board units (Refer to Section 3.2.4.4.)  
Step 4:Disconnect connectors CN6, CN7, CN8, and CN10.  
H
a
r
n
e
s
s
t
o
C
N
7
(
6
-
p
i
n
)
t
o
C
N
6
(
7
-
p
i
n
)
C
N
2
C
N
3
C
2
0
4
M
A
I
N
B
o
a
r
d
Figure 3-31. C204 MAIN Board Removal 1/4  
H
a
r
n
e
s
s
t
o
C
N
4
t
(
o
C
N
1
0
8
-
p
i
n
)
C
C
N
2
4
C
(
N
1
0
8
-
p
i
n
)
0
4
M
A
I
N
B
o
a
r
d
Figure 3-32. C204 MAIN Board Removal 2/4  
H
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
2
0
4
M
A
I
N
B
o
a
r
d
C
N
8
(
8
-
p
i
n
)
Figure 3-33. C204 MAIN Board Removal 3/4  
Rev. B  
3-24  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
Step 5:Remove the four CBB (M3x12) screws and two CBS (O) (M3x8) screws securing the C204 MAIN  
board unit and remove the board.  
:
:
C
C
B
B
S
B
(
(
O
M
)
(
M
3
X
8
)
X
2
3
X
1
2
)
X
4
C
2
0
4
M
A
I
N
B
o
a
r
d
U
n
i
t
H
o
o
k
s
f
o
r
C
2
0
4
M
A
I
N
B
o
Figure 3-34. C204 MAIN Board Removal 4/4  
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED  
When you install the C204 MAIN board assembly, perform the following adjustments:  
zꢀ Platen gap motor value (platen gap) adjustment (described in Section 4.1.7).  
zꢀ Bidirectional printing adjustment (described in Section 4.1.8).  
3-25  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.4.6 AC Inlet Removal  
Step 1: Remove the C204 power supply board assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.4.2)  
Step 2: Remove the C204 MAIN board assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.4.5)  
Step 3: Remove the three CBB (M3x8) screws and one CB (O) (M4x6) screw securing the grounding  
plate to the bottom panel assembly and remove the grounding plate.  
C
B
B
(
M
3
X
8
)
B
o
t
t
o
m
P
a
n
e
l
A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
G
r
o
u
n
d
i
n
g
P
l
a
t
e
C
(
B
(
O
X
)
M
4
6
)
A
C
I
n
l
e
t
S
e
t
Figure 3-35. Grounding Plate Removal  
Step 4:Remove the two CFS (M3x10) screws securing the AC inlet to the grounding plate and remove  
the AC inlet.  
A
C
I
n
l
e
t
S
e
t
G
P
r
o
u
n
d
i
n
g
l
a
t
e
C
F
S
(
M
3
X
1
0
)
Figure 3-36. AC Inlet Removal  
Rev. B  
3-26  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.4.7 C204 PNL Board Removal  
Step 1: Remove the front panel unit. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.3)  
Step 2: Disconnect connectors CN1 and CN2 on the C204 PNL board.  
Step 3: Remove the CBB (M4x10) screw securing the C204 PNL board to the front panel unit and remove  
the board.  
C
B
B
(
M
4
X
1
0
)
F
r
o
n
t
P
a
n
e
l
C
2
0
4
P
N
L
B
o
a
r
d
C
N
2
C
N
1
Figure 3-37. C204 PNL Board Removal  
3-27  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.5 Interlock Switch and Cover Open Sensor Assembly Removal  
Step 1: Remove the upper case. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.4)  
Step 2: Disconnect the interlock switch cable and the cover open sensor cable from the junction board  
respectively.  
C
o
v
e
r
O
p
e
n
S
e
n
s
o
r
C
S
o
v
e
s
r
O
p
e
n
e
n
o
r
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
R
W
e
d
:
3
-
p
i
n
I
n
t
e
r
l
o
c
k
S
W
.
h
i
t
e
:
2
-
p
i
n
C
J
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
B
o
a
r
d
C
2
0
4
M
A
I
N
B
o
a
r
d
C
N
3
Figure 3-38. Interlock Switch Assembly Removal  
Step 3:Remove the CBB (M4x10) screw securing the interlock switch assembly to the lower case. and  
remove it.  
Step 4:Remove the CBB (M3x10) screw securing the cover open sensor to the upper case. and remove  
it.  
I
A
n
t
e
r
l
o
c
k
S
W
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
C
B
B
(
M
4
X
1
0
)
L
o
w
e
r
C
a
s
e
Figure 3-39. Interlock Switch Assembly Removal  
C
B
B
(
M
3
X
1
0
)
C
S
o
v
e
s
r
O
p
e
n
U
p
p
e
r
C
a
s
e
e
n
o
r
Figure 3-40. Interlock Switch and Cover Open Sensor Removal  
Rev. B  
3-28  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6 Printer Mechanism Removal  
This section describes how to remove and disassemble the printer mechanism. Before following the steps in  
this section, remove the printer mechanism from the printer as described in Section 3.2.6.  
WARNING  
Because the printer mechanism is large and heavy, you must be careful when you remove it. When  
you lift or lower the printer mechanism, follow these precautions:  
;Two people are required to remove or install the printer mechanism.  
;Use the lift handles (#E656, part number B765111001) designed for lifting or lowering the printer  
mechanism when you remove or install it.  
;To avoid straining your waist, hands, or feet, place the printer on a low table before following the  
steps below.  
Step 1: Remove the upper case. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.4.)  
Step 2: Remove the interlock switch assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.5)  
Step 3: Remove the two CBS (O) (M4x8) screws securing the green and yellow earth cables to the  
grounding plate. Then disconnect connectors (1) through (4) as shown in Figure 3-41. (Ensure all  
connectors (1) through (7) indicated in the figure are disconnected.)  
Step 4: Remove the CBS (O) (M4x8) screw securing the earth cable as shown in Figure 3-42.  
5
4
F
C
C
F
I
C
C
l
l
a
t
t
C
C
a
a
b
b
l
l
e
e
C
C
o
o
n
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
o
o
r
r
1
2
3
1
N
N
4
9
(
(
4
7
-
-
p
p
i
i
n
n
)
)
:
:
C
O
R
C
o
n
p
t
i
o
n
a
t
4
n
e
r
l
o
c
k
S
w
i
t
c
h
C
a
b
l
5
N
N
3
5
(
(
2
1
-
4
p
i
p
n
)
n
:
C
o
v
e
r
6
7
-
i
)
:
P
a
n
e
l
E
a
r
t
h
C
a
b
l
e
3
6
2
7
E
a
r
t
h
C
a
b
l
e
Figure 3-41. Connector Removal (left side)  
E
a
r
t
h
C
a
b
l
e
C
B
S
(
O
)
S
c
r
e
w
(
M
4
C
B
2
0
4
P
S
B
/
P
S
E
o
a
r
d
B
A
o
s
t
t
o
m
P
a
n
e
l
s
e
m
b
l
y
(
R
i
g
h
t
s
i
d
e
)
Figure 3-42. Connector Removal (right side)  
3-29  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Step 5: Remove the four screws securing the printer mechanism to the lower case.  
S
c
r
e
w
s
S
c
r
e
w
s
Figure 3-43. Printer Mechanism Removal 1/2  
Step 6: Install the lift handles from the inside of the printer mechanism. Insert each handle through the  
two holes in the side frames of the printer mechanism. Then slowly lift up the printer mechanism  
using the handles and remove it from the lower case.  
L
i
f
t
H
a
n
d
l
e
#
E
6
5
6
P
r
i
n
t
e
r
M
e
c
h
a
n
i
s
m
L
o
w
e
r
H
o
u
s
i
n
g
A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
Figure 3-44. Printer Mechanism Removal 2/2  
ASSEMBLING POINT  
When you install the printer mechanism, route the cables as shown in Figures 3-41 and 3-42. Make sure  
the cables do not get caught between the printer mechanism and lower case.  
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED  
When you install the printer mechanism, perform the following adjustments:  
Platen gap motor value (platen gap) adjustment (described in Section 4.1.7)  
Bidirectional printing adjustment (described in Section 4.1.8)  
Rev. B  
3-30  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.1 Fan Removal  
Step 1: Remove the upper case unit. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.4.)  
Step 2: Remove the right cover. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.2.)  
Step 3: Disconnect the connector for the fan from the relay connector.  
Step 4: Remove the CP(O) screw securing the fan duct to the left frame and the CC screw securing the  
fan and the fan duct to the shaft on the left frame. Then remove the fan along with the fan duct.  
C
P
(
O
)
(
4
x
5
)
L
e
f
t
F
r
a
m
e
C
C
(
3
x
3
0
)
Figure 3-45. Fan Removal  
3-31  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.2 Ribbon Feed Change Lever Unit Removal  
Step 1: Release the three hooks securing the ribbon feed gear cover to the ribbon feed motor frame and  
remove the cover and the ribbon feed gear.  
Step 2: Disconnect the three connectors for the ribbon feed motor, tractor select sensor, and the ribbon  
jam sensor from the connector junction board, as shown in Figure 3-47 and Figure 3-48.  
Step 3: Remove the head damper from the left side frame.  
Step 4: Remove the fan on the left frame. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.1.)  
R
i
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
G
e
a
r
C
o
v
e
r
H
(
e
a
d
D
u
m
p
e
r
L
e
f
t
)
R
G
i
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
e
a
r
R
C
i
h
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
R
M
i
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
a
n
g
e
L
e
v
e
r
U
n
i
t
o
o
t
t
o
o
r
r
R
M
i
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
F
r
a
m
e
Figure 3-46. Ribbon Feed Change Lever Unit Removal (1/2)  
Step 5: Remove the two CBS (M3x6) screw securing the ribbon feed change lever unit to the left side frame,  
then remove the ribbon feed change lever unit.  
C
B
S
(
M
3
X
6
)
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
J
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
B
o
a
r
d
C
R
o
i
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
f
o
r
b
b
o
n
J
a
m
S
e
n
s
o
r
(
R
)
C
R
o
i
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
f
o
r
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
m
o
t
o
r
(
W
)
C
T
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
f
o
r
R
L
i
b
b
o
n
F
e
i
e
d
C
h
a
n
g
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
S
e
n
s
o
r
(
Y
)
e
v
e
r
U
n
t
C
B
S
(
M
3
X
6
)
Figure 3-47. Ribbon Feed Change Lever Unit Removal (2/2)  
Rev. B  
3-32  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
T
o
R
F
M
o
t
o
r
T
o
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
S
e
T
o
R
i
b
b
o
n
J
a
m
S
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
J
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
B
o
a
r
d
Figure 3-48. Removing Connectors  
ASSEMBLING POINT  
When you install the ribbon feed change lever unit, join the tip of the tractor select lever and the tractor  
select gear holder correctly. (Refer to Figure 2-12.)  
3-33  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.3 Tractor Select Lever (Upper and Lower) Assembly Disassembly  
This section describes how to disassemble the tractor select lever assembly, including how to remove the  
ribbon feed motor and tractor select sensor.  
Step 1: Remove the ribbon feed change lever unit. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.2.)  
Step 2: Remove the two CP(S-P1)(M3x6) screws, leaf springs, and washers securing the ribbon feed  
motor to the ribbon feed motor frame and remove the motor.  
Step 3: Remove the E ring (# 3) securing the upper/lower tractor select levers and remove the levers.  
Step 4: Remove the E ring (# 3) securing the tractor select cam and remove the cam.  
Step 5: Remove the CPS(P1)(M2x10) screw securing the tractor select sensor and remove the sensor.  
Step 6: Using wire cutters, cut the wire band securing the ribbon feed motor and tractor select sensor  
cables to the ribbon feed motor frame.  
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
C
a
m
W
a
s
h
e
r
L
e
a
f
S
p
r
i
n
g
E
-
r
i
n
g
(
3
)
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
T
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
T
U
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
L
e
v
e
r
E
-
r
i
n
g
(
3
)
p
p
e
r
T
T
r
r
a
a
c
n
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
T
L
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
G
e
a
r
e
v
e
r
S
p
r
i
n
g
C
P
S
(
P
1
)
(
M
2
X
1
0
)
T
S
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
e
n
s
o
r
T
L
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
e
v
e
r
l
o
w
e
r
R
F
i
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
M
o
t
o
r
r
a
(
m
e
R
i
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
M
o
t
o
r
C
P
S
-
P
1
)
(
M
3
X
6
)
Figure 3-49. Tractor Select Lever Disassembly  
ASSEMBLING POINT  
zꢀ Attach the tractor select levers to the tractor select cam as shown in Figure 3-50.  
R
i
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
M
o
t
o
r
F
r
a
m
e
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
C
a
m
T
a
r
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
G
e
a
r
H
o
l
d
e
R
i
b
b
o
n
F
e
e
d
C
h
a
n
g
e
L
e
v
e
r
(
U
p
p
e
r
a
n
d
L
o
w
e
r
)
Figure 3-50. Tractor Select Lever Installation  
Rev. B  
3-34  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.4 Ribbon Jam Sensor Removal  
Step 1: Remove the right cover. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.2)  
Step 2: Disconnect the connector for the sensor from the connector junction board.  
Step 3: Remove the CP(S-P1) (M3x6) screw securing the sensor to the bracket, and remove the sensor.  
C
P
(
S
-
P
1
)
(
M
3
x
6
F
r
o
n
t
/
R
e
a
r
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
l
e
c
t
L
e
v
e
r
A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
Figure 3-51. Ribbon Jam Sensor Removal  
3-35  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.5 Connector Junction Board Assembly and FPC Board Assembly Removal  
This section describes how to remove the connector junction board assembly and FPC board assembly.  
Step 1: Remove the left side cover. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.2)  
Step 2: Disconnect all the cables from the connector junction board assembly. Remove the two CP (S-  
P1) (M3x6) screws securing the connector junction board assembly to the printer mechanism and  
then remove the connector junction board assembly.  
Step 3: Remove the front/rear tractor select lever assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.2)  
Step 4: Disconnect the connector for the CR sensor (encoder) from the FPC board assembly.  
Step 5: Remove the 2 CBS (M3x8) screws securing the FPC cover and remove the cover (Refer to  
Figure 3-10). Then remove the CPS(P-1) (M3x6) screw securing the FPC board assembly to the  
printer mechanism and remove the FPC board assembly.  
F
P
C
B
o
a
r
d
A
s
s
e
m
C
R
E
n
c
o
d
e
r
C
o
n
n
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
J
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
B
o
a
r
d
C
P
S
(
P
3
1
)
(
M
3
x
6
)
C
P
S
(
S
P
-
1
)
(
M
x
6
)
Figure 3-52. Connector Junction Board Removal  
ASSEMBLING POINT  
When you connect the cables to the connector junction board assembly, note that the matching  
connectors have the same color and number of pins (Refer to APPENDIX Figure A-15.).  
Rev. B  
3-36  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.6 PG Sensor and PG Motor Removal  
CAUTION  
When you remove or install the PG sensor, be careful not to bend the PG motor encoder plate.  
Step 1: Remove the connector junction board assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.5)  
Step 2: Remove the CBS screw (3X6) securing the PG sensor unit to the left frame. Then take out the  
unit to the front and remove it.  
Step 3: Remove the screw securing the PG sensor to the unit, and remove the sensor.  
Step 4: Remove two CP (S-P1) (M3x6) screws securing the PG motor and remove the motor.  
E
n
c
o
d
e
r
P
l
a
t
e
P
G
M
o
t
o
r
P
G
M
o
t
o
r
P
i
n
i
o
C
P
(
S
-
P
1
)
(
M
3
x
6
)
P
l
a
t
e
n
G
a
p
S
e
n
C
P
S
(
P
)
(
M
3
X
6
)
Figure 3-53. PG Sensor and PG Motor Removal  
ASSEMBLING POINT  
When you install the PG motor, make sure the backlash between the PG motor and PG motor  
transmission gear is between 0.05 and 0.15 mm (almost no backlash).  
When you install the PG sensor unit, align the C-cut portion of the unit with the lower shaft securing  
the PG motor to the frame.  
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED  
When you install the PG sensor or PG motor, perform the platen gap motor value (platen gap)  
adjustment, as described in Section 4.1.7.  
3-37  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.7 Plunger and Paper Bail Assembly Removal  
This section describes how to remove the plunger (loading solenoid) and paper bail assembly.  
Step 1: Disconnect the black, 2-pin plunger connector from the connector junction board assembly, and  
remove the plunger cable from the connector junction board assembly.  
Step 2: Remove the two CP(S-P1) (M3x6) screws securing the plunger to the left side frame and remove  
the plunger.  
Step 3: Remove the iron core of the plunger from the paper bail shaft.  
I
r
o
n
C
o
r
e
C
P
(
S
-
P
1
)
(
M
3
X
6
)
P
l
u
n
g
e
r
2
B
-
p
a
i
n
l
c
k
Figure 3-54. Plunger Removal  
Rev. B  
3-38  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
Step 4: Remove the left tension roller lever spring.  
Step 5: Remove the E-ring (6) securing the paper bail shaft to the left frame and remove the platen roller  
shaft holder and paper bail lever.  
E
-
r
i
n
g
s
S
h
a
f
t
H
o
l
d
e
r
P
a
p
e
r
B
a
i
l
S
h
a
f
t
P
a
p
e
r
B
a
i
l
L
e
v
e
r
E
-
r
i
n
g
T
L
e
n
s
i
o
n
R
o
l
l
e
r
e
v
e
r
S
p
r
i
n
g
Figure 3-55. Paper Bail Assembly Removal 1/2  
Step 6: Disconnect 2 fan harnesses and remove 2 screws (CPS-P1) securing the CR fan duct. Then  
remove the CR fan duct along with the CR fan. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.1.)  
Step 7: Remove the right tension roller lever spring.  
Step 8: Remove 2 E-rings to release the release tension lever at the inner side of the left frame.  
Step 9: Remove the E-ring (6) at the right end of the paper bail shaft. Then remove the paper bail lever,  
leaf spring and shaft holder.  
Step 10: Slide the shaft left to release the right end of the shaft from the right frame. Then lift up the shaft  
by the right end and remove it along with the release tension lever.  
E
-
r
i
n
g
(
6
)
P
a
p
e
r
B
a
i
l
A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
S
h
a
f
t
H
o
l
d
e
r
L
e
a
f
S
p
r
i
n
g
P
a
p
e
r
B
a
i
l
L
e
v
e
r
Figure 3-56. Paper Bail Assembly Removal 2/2  
3-39  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.8 Upper Paper Guide and Top PE Sensor Removal  
Step 1: Remove the paper bail assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.7)  
Step 2: Disconnect the red, 3-pin, top PE sensor connector from the connector junction board assembly.  
L
F
e
f
t
S
i
d
e
r
a
m
e
T
C
o
p
P
E
S
e
r
n
s
o
r
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
C
B
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
J
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
o
a
r
d
Figure 3-57. Top PE Sensor Connector Removal  
Step 3: Remove the two CBS (M4x6) screws securing the upper paper guide to both frames and remove the  
paper guide.  
Step 4: Remove the two CPS(SP) (M3x8) screws securing the top PE sensor to the upper paper guide and  
remove the sensor.  
U
p
p
e
r
P
a
p
e
r
G
u
i
d
e
T
o
p
P
E
S
e
n
s
o
r
C
B
S
(
M
4
X
6
)
C
B
S
(
M
4
X
6
)
C
P
S
(
S
P
)
(
M
4
X
8
)
Figure 3-58. Top PE Sensor Removal  
Rev. B  
3-40  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.9 Tension Roller Shaft Removal  
This section describes how to remove the tension roller shaft. It is better to remove the tension roller shaft  
with the paper bail assembly removed; however, removing it is not required. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.7.) for  
instructions on how to remove the paper bail assembly.)  
Step 1: Remove the connector junction board assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.5.)  
Step 2: Remove the paper bail assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.7.)  
Step 3: While pushing the tension pulley to the front, remove the CR timing belt.  
Step 4: Remove the upper paper guide. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.8.)  
Step 5: Using tweezers, unlock the locking tab of the tension roller gear at the left end of the tension roller  
shaft, and remove the gear.  
Step 6: Remove the E-ring (6) on the left end of the tension roller shaft and remove the shaft holder.  
R
i
g
h
t
L
e
f
t
E
-
r
i
n
g
(
6
)
T
e
n
s
i
o
n
R
o
l
l
e
r
G
T
A
e
n
s
s
i
m
o
n
R
o
l
l
e
r
S
h
a
f
t
s
e
b
l
y
T
e
n
s
i
o
n
R
o
l
l
e
r
S
h
a
f
t
H
o
l
d
e
r
Figure 3-59. Tension Roller Gear Removal  
3-41  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Step 7: Remove the CR motor fan. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.19.)  
Step 8: Remove the E-ring (6) at the right end of the tension roller shaft and remove the tension roller shaft  
holder along with the leaf spring and the washer.  
Step 9: Remove the tension roller shaft by taking it out from the right frame.  
T
A
e
n
s
s
i
m
o
n
R
o
l
l
e
r
S
h
a
f
t
s
e
b
l
y
T
e
n
s
i
o
n
R
o
l
l
e
r
S
h
a
f
t
H
o
l
L
e
a
f
S
p
r
i
n
g
W
a
s
h
e
r
E
-
r
i
n
g
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
M
o
t
o
r
Figure 3-60. Shaft Holder Removal  
F
r
o
n
t
L
e
f
t
T
A
e
n
s
s
i
m
o
n
R
o
l
l
e
r
S
h
a
f
t
s
e
b
l
y
Figure 3-61. Tension Roller Shaft Removal  
Rev. B  
3-42  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.10 Platen Removal  
Step 1: Remove the paper bail assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.7.)  
Step 2: Remove the upper paper guide. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.8.)  
Step 3: Remove the four hexagon socket screws securing the platen to the platen holders. Then remove  
the platen with the lower paper guide composed of 3 parts in it.  
Step 4: Slide the 3 parts of the lower paper guide to release the notches and remove them one by one  
from the platen.  
H
e
x
a
g
o
n
S
o
c
k
e
t
S
c
r
e
w
P
l
a
t
e
n
R
e
a
r
P
l
a
t
e
n
H
o
l
d
e
r
(
R
i
g
h
P
l
a
t
e
n
H
o
l
d
e
r
(
L
e
f
t
)
L
o
w
e
r
P
a
p
e
r
G
u
i
d
e
Figure 3-62. Platen Removal  
N
o
t
h
r
o
u
g
h
R
e
a
r
P
l
a
t
e
n
F
r
o
n
t
0
.
0
3
m
m
P
P
l
o
a
t
e
n
H
o
l
d
e
r
T
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
G
a
u
g
e
s
i
t
i
o
n
n
i
n
g
T
a
b
Figure 3-63. Platen Positioning  
ASSEMBLING POINT  
When you attach the 3 parts of the lower paper guide to the platen, start with the one at the right end  
and work toward the left.  
When you mount the platen to the platen holders, space between the platen and positioning tab on  
the both sides must be less than 0.03mm. (Refer to Figure 3-63.)  
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED  
When you install the platen, perform the following adjustments:  
Carriage guide shaft parallelism adjustment (described in Section 4.1.5 and Section 4.1.6)  
Platen angle (right angle) adjustment (described in Section 4.1.6)  
Platen gap motor value (platen gap) adjustment (described in Section 4.1.7)  
3-43  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.11 Paper Jam Sensor Removal  
Step 1: Remove the platen along with the lower paper guide composed of 3 parts. (Refer to Section  
3.2.6.10.)  
Step 2: Remove the CPN(SP)(M4x8) screw securing the left part of the lower paper guide to the platen.  
Step 3: Remove the part from the platen.  
P
l
a
t
e
n
R
i
g
h
t
L
e
f
t
L
o
w
e
r
P
a
p
e
r
G
u
i
d
e
C
P
N
(
S
P
)
(
M
4
X
8
)
Figure 3-64. Lower Paper Guide Left Part Removal  
Step 4: Unhook the paper jam sensor (magnetic transistor) cover to remove it.  
Step 5: Remove the paper jam sensor.  
P
a
p
e
r
J
a
m
S
e
n
s
o
r
P
C
a
p
e
e
r
r
J
a
m
S
e
n
s
o
r
o
v
L
o
w
e
r
P
a
p
e
r
G
u
i
d
e
(
L
e
f
t
)
Figure 3-65. Paper Jam Sensor Removal  
ASSEMBLING POINT  
When you attach the paper jam sensor, make sure it is oriented correctly (front to back).  
Rev. B  
3-44  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.12 Pull Tractor Sensor Removal  
Step 1: Remove the upper paper guide. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.8)  
Step 2: Disconnect the red 2-pin pull tractor sensor connector from the connector junction board  
assembly.  
Step 3: Remove the CP(S) (M2x14) screw securing the pull tractor sensor (a micro-switch type sensor) to  
the left side frame and remove the sensor.  
C
P
(
S
)
(
M
2
X
1
4
)
W
a
s
h
e
r
P
u
l
l
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
n
s
P
l
a
t
e
n
H
o
l
d
e
r
(
R
H
e
x
a
g
o
n
N
u
t
Figure 3-66. Pull Tractor Sensor removal  
3-45  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.13 Paper Width (PW) Sensor Removal  
Step 1: Disconnect the connector for the PW sensor.  
Step 2: Remove the CP(S-P1) (M2.5x6) screw securing the PW sensor to the ribbon mask holder.  
P
a
p
e
r
W
i
d
t
h
S
e
n
s
o
r
C
P
(
S
-
P
1
)
(
M
2
.
5
x
6
)
P
a
p
e
r
W
i
d
t
h
S
e
n
s
o
r
C
o
n
n
e
c
Figure 3-67. PW Sensor Removal  
Rev. B  
3-46  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.14 PG Home Sensor Removal  
Step 1: Remove the front/rear tractor select lever assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.2.)  
Step 2: Remove the E-ring securing the carriage guide shaft gear to the rear carriage guide shaft.  
C
(
a
r
r
a
i
a
g
e
G
u
i
d
e
S
R
e
r
)
C
G
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
G
u
i
d
e
S
e
a
r
E
-
r
i
n
g
Figure 3-68. Carriage Guide Shaft Gear Removal  
Step 3: Disconnect the white, 2-pin, PG home sensor connector from the connector junction board  
assembly.  
Step 4: Detach the hook securing the PG home sensor and remove the sensor.  
P
G
H
o
m
e
S
e
n
s
o
r
P
l
a
t
e
n
G
a
p
(
P
G
)
M
Figure 3-69. PG Home Sensor Removal  
3-47  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
ASSEMBLING POINT  
When you install the CR guide shaft gear, align the rib in the CR guide shaft gear with the PG adjustment  
transmission gear as shown in the figure below, then rotate the CR guide shaft gear 10 mm in CCW.  
F
l
a
t
P
a
r
t
o
f
C
R
G
u
i
d
e
S
h
a
f
t
(
R
e
a
r
)
F
r
a
m
e
L
e
f
t
A
d
v
a
n
c
e
1
0
m
m
S
t
o
p
p
e
r
C
S
R
G
u
i
d
e
h
a
f
t
G
e
a
r
P
T
G
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
G
e
a
r
Figure 3-70. CR Guide Shaft Gear Phase Alignment  
Rev. B  
3-48  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.15 PF Motor Removal  
Step 1: Remove the connector junction board assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.5.)  
Step 2: Remove the three CP (SP-1) (M4x8) screws securing the PF motor to the left side frame.  
Step 3: Remove the PF motor from the inside of the left side frame.  
C
P
(
S
-
P
1
)
(
M
4
X
8
P
a
p
e
r
F
e
e
d
M
o
t
o
r
Figure 3-71. PG Home Sensor Removal  
3-49  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.16 Left Side Frame Gear Removal  
Step 1: Remove the front/rear tractor select lever assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.2.)  
Step 2: Remove the connector junction board assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.5.)  
Step 3: Remove the PG motor. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.6.)  
Step 4: Remove the series of gears in the order indicated by the numbers in Figure 3-72.  
Figure 3-72. Left Side Frame Gear Removal  
Rev. B  
3-50  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.17 Front Tractor Assembly Removal  
This section describes how to remove the front tractor assembly.  
Step 1: Disconnect the connector white 3-pin front PE sensor from the connector junction board.  
Step 2: Remove the connector junction board assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.5.)  
Step 3: Lay the mechanism on its back.  
Step 4: Remove the screw securing the tractor wire holder to the left side frame and remove the holder.  
Step 5: Loosen the flange nut securing the front tractor assembly to the left side frame by the left end,  
and remove the tractor transmission gear.  
Step 6: Remove the flange nut on the right side and remove the right tractor wire spring holder set.  
Step 7: Remove the E-ring (6) securing the rear shaft of the front tractor assembly to the left side frame  
and remove the shaft holder.  
Step 8: Move the assembly to left to release the right end of the shaft, then release the left side of the shaft  
from the left side frame and remove the assembly.  
F
l
a
n
g
e
N
u
t
C
M
a
r
r
i
a
g
o
t
o
r
C
B
S
(
M
4
X
8
)
T
H
r
a
c
d
t
o
r
W
i
r
e
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
W
i
r
e
H
o
l
d
e
r
(
L
)
T
W
r
a
c
t
o
r
o
l
e
r
(
R
)
i
r
e
S
p
r
i
n
g
<
L
e
f
t
>
<
R
i
g
h
t
>
Figure 3-73. Tractor Wire Removal  
F
E
l
a
n
g
e
N
u
t
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
T
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
G
e
a
r
-
r
i
n
g
(
6
)
F
l
a
n
g
e
N
u
t
S
L
h
a
f
t
H
o
l
d
e
a
f
S
p
r
i
n
g
W
a
s
h
e
r
S
h
a
f
t
H
o
l
d
e
r
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
(
F
r
o
E
-
r
i
n
g
(
6
)
Figure 3-74. Front Tractor Assembly Removal  
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED  
When you install the front tractor assembly, perform the tractor wire spring adjustment, as described  
in Section 4.1.3.  
3-51  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.18 Rear Tractor Assembly Removal  
This section describes how to remove the rear tractor assembly.  
Step 1: Disconnect the connector white 3-pin rear PE sensor from the connector junction board.  
Step 2: Remove the connector junction board assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.5.)  
Step 3: Remove the flange nut securing the wire holder spring set to the right side frame, and remove the  
set.  
Step 4: Loosen the flange nut securing the rear tractor assembly to the left side frame.  
Step 5: Remove the CBS(M4x8) screw securing the tractor wire holder and remove the holder.  
Step 6: Remove the rear tractor gear.  
Step 7: Remove the E-ring and release the shaft holder from the left side frame.  
Step 8: To remove the rear tractor assembly, first move it to the left to release the right end of the shaft  
from the right side frame. Then release the left end of the shaft and remove the assembly.  
R
i
g
h
t
L
e
f
t
F
l
a
n
g
e
N
u
t
S
h
a
f
t
H
o
l
d
e
r
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
W
i
r
e
H
o
L
e
a
f
S
p
r
i
n
g
W
a
s
h
e
r
E
-
r
i
n
g
(
6
)
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
G
e
a
r
F
l
a
n
g
e
N
u
t
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
(
R
e
a
r
)
C
P
N
(
M
4
x
8
)
E
-
r
i
n
g
(
6
)
S
h
a
f
t
H
o
l
d
e
r
Figure 3-75. Rear Tractor Assembly Removal  
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED  
When you install the rear tractor assembly, perform the tractor wire spring adjustment, as described in  
Section 4.1.3.  
Rev. B  
3-52  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.19 CR Motor Fan Removal  
Step 1: Disconnect the cable for the motor from the relay connector.  
Step 2: Remove 2 fan fixing screws and remove the fan.  
F
a
n
F
i
x
i
n
g
S
c
r
e
w
s
C
R
M
o
t
o
r
F
a
n
R
i
g
h
t
F
r
a
m
e
Figure 3-76. CR Motor Fan Removal  
3-53  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.20 CR Motor Removal  
Step 1: Remove the right cover. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.2.)  
Step 2: Disconnect the red and black cables from the terminals on the CR motor. (two cables for each  
terminal)  
Step 3: Remove the three CP(S) (M4x10) screws securing the CR motor to the right side frame and remove  
the motor.  
C
P
(
S
)
(
M
4
X
1
0
)
C
R
M
o
t
o
r
Figure 3-77. CR Motor Removal  
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED  
When you install the CR motor, perform the carriage timing belt tension adjustment, as described in  
Section 4.1.2.  
When you install the printhead, perform the platen gap motor value (platen gap) adjustment, as  
described in Section 4.1.7.  
Rev. B  
3-54  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.21 CR (Carriage Encoder) Sensor Removal  
Step 1: Remove the printhead. (Refer to Section 3.2.2.)  
Step 2: Disconnect the red 4-pin CR sensor connector from the carriage connector junction board.  
Step 3: Remove the two CP(S-P1) (M2.6 x 5) screws securing the CR sensor to the carriage and remove  
the sensor.  
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
E
n
c
o
d
e
r
S
e
n
s
o
r
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
4
-
p
i
n
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
C
J
a
r
r
c
i
a
g
e
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
u
n
t
i
o
n
B
o
a
r
d
Figure 3-78. CR Sensor Removal 1/2  
C
P
(
S
-
P
1
)
(
M
2
.
6
X
5
)
C
S
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
E
n
c
o
d
e
r
e
n
s
o
r
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
Figure 3-79. CR Sensor Removal 2/2  
3-55  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.22 Carriage Mechanism Disassembly  
This section describes how to disassemble the carriage mechanism, including removing the carriage, CR  
timing belt, and front and rear carriage guide shafts.  
Step 1: Remove the CR motor. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.20.)  
Step 2: Remove the belt pulley from the belt pulley holder.  
S
i
d
e
F
r
a
m
e
(
L
)
B
e
l
t
P
u
l
l
e
y
B
H
e
l
t
P
u
l
l
e
y
o
l
d
e
r
Figure 3-80. Belt Pulley Removal  
Step 3: Unhook the spring securing the encoder belt to the right side frame. (Refer to Figure 2-5.)  
Step 4: Loosen the two flange nuts securing the front carriage guide shaft to the left and right side frames.  
F
l
a
n
g
e
N
u
t
F
l
a
n
g
e
N
u
t
F
r
o
n
t
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
G
u
i
d
e
S
h
a
f
t
Figure 3-81. Front Carriage Guide Shaft Removal  
Rev. B  
3-56  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
Step 5: Remove the front carriage guide shaft by pulling it through the hole in the right side frame. (When  
you remove the front carriage guide shaft, move the carriage to the left side.)  
Step 6: On the left side frame, remove the E-ring (6) securing the carriage guide shaft gear to the rear  
carriage guide shaft, then remove the carriage guide shaft gear and paper thickness sensor holder.  
Step 7: Unhook the spring securing the paper thickness sensor assembly and remove the sensor  
assembly.  
R
e
a
r
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
G
u
i
d
e
P
S
a
e
p
n
e
s
r
T
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
o
r
C
S
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
G
u
i
d
e
h
a
f
t
G
e
a
r
E
-
r
i
n
g
(
6
)
C
P
(
P
)
(
M
3
X
6
)
P
G
M
o
t
o
r
Figure 3-82. Rear Carriage Guide Shaft Removal  
Step 8: Remove the PG motor. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.6.)  
Step 9: Remove the carriage damper (solid rubber) from the inner side of the right side frame, and remove  
the three CBS (M4x8) screws securing the carriage motor holder to the right side frame.  
Step 10: Remove the guide shaft holding spring and the E-ring, then remove the right guide shaft holder  
lever.  
Step 11: Remove the two CP(S-P1) (M4x6) screws securing the parallelism adjust lever and remove the  
lever.  
Step 12: Remove the rear carriage guide shaft with the carriage base from the right side frame.  
R
e
a
r
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
G
u
i
d
e
S
h
a
f
t
P
a
r
a
l
l
e
l
i
s
m
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
C
P
(
S
-
P
1
)
(
M
4
X
6
)
G
(
u
i
d
e
S
h
a
f
t
H
o
l
d
e
R
i
g
h
t
)
G
u
i
d
e
S
h
a
f
t
H
o
l
d
i
C
P
(
S
-
P
1
)
(
M
4
X
6
)
C
B
S
(
M
4
X
8
)
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
M
o
t
o
r
H
o
l
d
e
r
Figure 3-83. Right Side Frame Removal  
3-57  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
ASSEMBLING POINT  
When you install the front carriage guide shaft, tighten the screws while pushing the shaft toward the  
platen.  
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED  
When you assemble the carriage mechanism, perform the following adjustments:  
Carriage timing belt tension adjustment (described in Section 4.1.2)  
Carriage guide shaft parallelism adjustment (described in Section 4.1.5 and Section 4.1.6)  
Platen gap motor value (platen gap) adjustment (described in Section 4.1.7)  
Bidirectional printing adjustment (described in Section 4.1.8)  
Rev. B  
3-58  
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY  
3.2.6.23 Paper Support Assembly Removal  
Step 1: Disassemble the carriage mechanism and remove all the parts related to the carriage. (Refer to  
Section 3.2.6.22.)  
Step 2: Referring to the exploded diagram in the Appendix, remove the paper support assembly.  
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED  
When you install the paper support assembly, perform the following adjustments:  
Carriage timing belt tension adjustment (described in Section 4.1.2)  
Carriage guide shaft parallelism adjustment (described in Section 4.1.5 and Section 4.1.6)  
Platen gap motor value (platen gap) adjustment (described in Section 4.1.7)  
Bidirectional printing adjustment (described in Section 4.1.8)  
3-59  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3.2.6.24 3.2.6.21 PF Drive Roller Removal  
Step 1: Remove the platen. (Refer to 3.2.6.10)  
Step 2: Remove the CR motor. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.20)  
Step 3: Remove the left side frame gears. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.16)  
Step 4: Referring to the exploded diagram in the Appendix, remove the PF driver roller.  
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED  
When you install the PF drive roller, perform the following adjustments:  
Carriage timing belt tension adjustment (described in Section 4.1.2)  
Carriage guide shaft parallelism adjustment (described in Section 4.1.5 and Section 4.1.6)  
Platen gap motor value (platen gap) adjustment (described in Section 4.1.7)  
Bidirectional printing adjustment (described in Section 4.1.8)  
Rev. B  
3-60  
CHAPTER 4  
ADJUSTMENT  
4.1 PRINTER MECHANISM ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................4-1  
4.1.1 PG Motor Backlash Adjustment........................................................................................... 4-1  
4.1.2 Carriage Timing Belt Tension Adjustment.......................................................................... 4-2  
4.1.3 Tractor Wire Spring Tension Adjustment........................................................................... 4-3  
4.1.4 Pull Tractor Sensor Position Adjustment............................................................................ 4-4  
4.1.5 Carriage Guide Shaft Parallelism Adjustment.................................................................... 4-5  
4.1.6 Platen Angle Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 4-9  
4.1.7 Platen Gap Motor Value Adjustment.................................................................................. 4-12  
4.1.8 Measurement Seeking and Bi-directional Printing Adjustment...................................... 4-15  
ADJUSTMENT  
4.1 PRINTER MECHANISM ADJUSTMENTS  
This section describes the printer mechanism adjustments for the DFX-8500. Whenever the printer is  
disassembled and the printer parts mentioned in this section are replaced or repaired, perform the  
appropriate adjustments to ensure proper printer operation. Perform adjustments before assembling the  
printer.  
4.1.1 PG Motor Backlash Adjustment  
In the PG motor backlash adjustment, the PG motor pinion gear must mesh smoothly with the PG  
transmission gear cog. If the pinion gear is poorly aligned or the pinion gear and cog are too tight, printer  
operation is noisy or the character density is incorrect.  
CAUTION  
;If the PG motor backlash is too tight, PG motor doesn’t rotate smoothly and the panel indicates “E3.”  
Step 1: Loosen the two screws securing the PG motor to the left side frame. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.4)  
Step 2: Make sure the PG motor pinion gear is properly aligned with the PG transmission gear cog. Move  
the PG motor until there is 0.05 to 0.15 mm (0.002 to 0.01 inches) between the PG motor pinion gear  
and PG transmission gear cog. Then tighten the two screws.  
P
G
T
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
0
.
0
5
-
0
.
1
5
m
m
P
P
G
i
M
o
t
o
r
n
i
o
n
G
e
a
r
S
c
r
e
w
s
P
G
M
o
t
o
r
Figure 4-1. PG Motor Mounting Position Adjustment  
4-1  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
4.1.2 Carriage Timing Belt Tension Adjustment  
The carriage timing belt tension must be adjusted when any carriage mechanism part (such as the CR motor,  
belt pulley, or carriage timing belt) is disassembled. Remove the printer mechanism before performing this  
adjustment. (Refer to Section 3.2.6)  
CAUTION  
;Before performing this adjustment, carefully secure the printer mechanism because a 7 kg (15.4 lb.)  
force is applied to it when the tension lever is pulled in the horizontal direction.  
Step 1: Loosen the three tension adjustment screws on the CR motor. Confirm that the carriage timing belt is  
attached properly and that no load is applied to it.  
Step 2: Insert the tension gauge hook through the hole in the tension lever.  
Step 3: Pull the tension gauge horizontally to apply a 7 kg (15.4 lb.) force.  
Step 4: Move the belt left and right while pulling the tension gauge, and move the motor pulley slightly.  
Step 5: Tighten the three CPS(M4x10) tension adjustment screws and secure them while the 7 kg (15.4 lb.)  
force is applied.  
Step 6: Finish tightening the three tension adjustment screws with 12 Kg cm torque.  
C
P
S
(
M
4
X
1
0
)
7
0
0
0
g
f
+
2
0
0
g
Figure 4-2. Carriage Timing Belt Tension Adjustment  
4-2  
Rev. B  
ADJUSTMENT  
4.1.3 Tractor Wire Spring Tension Adjustment  
This section describes the tractor wire spring tension adjustment. If the spring is not adjusted properly, paper  
jams may occur, because the continuous paper tension (in the horizontal direction) is incorrect. When you  
remove the front or rear tractor assembly, perform this adjustment.  
Step 1: Remove the printer mechanism. (Refer to Section 3.2.6)  
Step 2: Release the release levers for the tractor sprockets on the front.  
Step 3: At the left side frame, loosen the CBS(M4 X 8) screws securing the wire holding plate (L).  
Step 4: Pull the tractor wire left to make correct tension to the tractor wire, wire holding plate ( R) and the tip  
of the gold seal are 5 mm (0.2 inches) apart.  
Step 5: Fix the CBS(M4 X 8) screws on the wire holding plate (L).  
Step 6: As the same manner, adjust the tractor spring tension for the rear tractor.  
W
i
r
e
H
o
l
d
i
n
g
P
l
a
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
W
i
G
o
l
d
S
e
a
l
T
e
n
s
i
o
n
S
p
5
m
m
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
W
i
r
e
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
W
i
r
e
T
e
n
s
i
o
n
S
p
r
i
n
g
C
B
S
(
M
4
X
8
)
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
R
e
l
e
a
s
e
L
e
v
e
r
W
i
r
e
H
o
l
d
i
n
g
P
l
a
t
e
(
L
)
1
0
-
1
5
m
m
P
a
u
l
l
,
a
d
j
u
s
t
,
f
i
x
,
n
d
c
u
t
h
e
r
e
.
Figure 4-3. Tractor Wire Tension Adjustment (Front)  
4-3  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
4.1.4 Pull Tractor Sensor Position Adjustment  
This section describes the pull tractor sensor position adjustment. If the sensor position is incorrect, the  
sensor is always on. When you replace or disassemble the platen, rear paper guide, platen roller shaft,  
tension roller shaft, or pull tractor sensor, perform this adjustment. Figure 4-4 illustrates the pull tractor sensor  
position adjustment.  
When you assemble the pull tractor sensor or rear paper guide, check the following items:  
Verify that the pull tractor sensor lever is touching the rear paper guide frame, but the sensor is  
off.  
Make sure the distance between the sensor lever and sensor switch is approximately 2 mm (.08  
inches).  
S
e
n
s
o
r
S
w
i
t
c
h
L
e
f
t
S
i
d
e
F
r
a
m
e
S
e
n
s
o
r
L
e
v
e
r
2
m
m
(
.
0
8
"
)
P
u
l
l
T
r
a
c
t
o
r
s
e
n
s
o
r
Figure 4-4. Pull Tractor Sensor Position Adjustment  
4-4  
Rev. B  
ADJUSTMENT  
4.1.5 Carriage Guide Shaft Parallelism Adjustment  
The rear carriage guide shaft must be parallel to the platen. If it is not, printing may be abnormal because  
paper is not fed evenly at the left and right sides of the platen. A paper jam may occur. This adjustment is  
required when the rear carriage guide shaft is removed during carriage mechanism disassembly, the  
parallelism adjust lever is moved, or the platen is removed. Do not remove the printer mechanism (If remove  
the printer mechanism from the lower case, the adjust value will be out of order when you reassemble the  
printer mechanism to the lower case.) Also, it is necessary to remove the tension roller shaft before  
performing this adjustment. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.7.)  
CAUTION  
The parallelism is adjusted so that the difference between the distances (from the rear carriage guide  
shaft to the platen measured at the two positions shown in Figure 4-5) is less than + 0.015 mm. Since  
this value is extremely small, you must use the two dial gauges, dial gauge base, and dial gauge  
master supplied by EPSON. Do not adjust the parallelism using any other method.  
;ꢀDial gauges (x 2) #F610 (Part No. B1019466)  
;Dial gauge base #F611 (Part No. B1019467)  
;Dial gauge master #F612 (Part No. B1019468).  
Before performing the carriage guide shaft parallelism adjustment, you must assemble the two dial gauges,  
dial gauge base, and dial gauge master to form one tool. Follow these steps:  
Step 1: Attach the two thumb screws for the dial gauge base to the dial gauge master. To eliminate any play  
between the dial gauge base and the dial gauge master, pull the tie band to secure the dial gauge  
base and the dial gauge master before you securing the thumb screws.(Do procedure with two men.)  
Figure 4-5. Set Dial Gauge to Dial Gauge Base  
Step 2: Attach a dial gauge needle to the surface of the dial gauge master (approx. 2.00 mm depth), then  
tighten the hexagonal screw securing the dial gauge to the dial gauge base.  
2. Tighten the hexagonal  
screw.  
1. Attach the gauge needle  
to the master surface.  
Figure 4-6. Dial Gauge Set Up 1  
4-5  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Step 3: Attach the another needle to the master surface, APPROX. 2.00 mm depth, then correspond to the  
another gauge measure, and tighten the hexagonal screw.  
3. Tighten the hexagonal screw.  
2. Attach the gauge needle to the  
master surface, then correspond  
to the another gauge measure.  
Figure 4-7. Dial Gauge set Up 2  
Step 5: Set the black marker to the "0" position.  
Figure 4-8. Black Marker to “0” Position Setting  
4-6  
Rev. B  
ADJUSTMENT  
Step 6: Remove a CP(PS)(M3X6) screw securing the timing belt holder to the timing belt, then remove the  
timing belt holder.  
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
G
u
i
d
e
S
h
a
f
t
(
R
C
P
(
P
S
)
M
3
X
6
)
T
i
m
i
n
g
B
e
l
t
H
o
l
d
e
r
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
Figure 4-9. Carriage Plate Removal  
Step 7: Remove the paper bail assembly. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.5.)  
Step 8: Remove the tension roller shaft. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.7.)  
Step 9: Remove the printhead with the mask-less holder. (Refer to Section 3.2.1.)  
Step 10:  
Attach the dial gauge base with the dial gauge in the same way as you attach the print head.  
Then you attach this tool to the carriage, tighten the two thumb screws while you pulling the dial  
gage base toward you.  
Step 11:  
Using the carriage guide shaft gear, adjust the gauge mounting position so that the tips of the  
gauges (portions A and B in the Figure 4-10) are securely attached to the platen.  
D
i
a
l
G
a
u
g
e
M
a
s
t
e
r
A
B
P
l
a
t
e
n
R
e
f
e
r
t
o
F
i
g
u
r
e
4
-
1
0
a
.
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
D
i
a
l
G
a
u
g
e
B
a
s
e
0
3
0
3
0
0
2
1
0
0
2
1
D
i
a
l
G
a
u
g
e
x
2
0
0
0
3
0
3
0
1
0
2
0
1
0
2
T
i
e
b
a
n
d
Figure 4-10. Dial Gauge Attachment  
C
R
G
u
i
d
e
S
h
a
f
t
G
e
a
r
S
t
o
p
p
e
r
P
G
T
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
G
e
a
r
Figure 4-10a. CR Guide Shaft Gear Positioning  
4-7  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Step 12:  
Measure the distance between the platen and the carriage guide shaft on the left side. Then  
measure the distance between the platen and the rear carriage guide shaft on the right side, and  
compare these values.(Figure4-11 shows the measurement position and the parallelism adjust  
lever operation.)  
Note: When you shift the carriage manually, do not touch the both dial gauges. Rotate the carriage  
motor pulley.  
7
0
m
m
7
0
m
m
3
0
2
1
0
0
R
i
g
h
t
S
i
d
e
F
r
a
m
e
0
3
0
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
P
a
r
a
l
l
e
l
i
1
0
2
0
A
d
j
u
s
t
L
e
v
e
r
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
M
o
t
o
M
o
t
o
r
P
u
l
l
e
y
Figure 4-11. Carriage Guide Shaft Parallelism Adjustment  
Step 13:  
If the distance measured at the left side is greater than that measured at the right side, move the  
parallelism adjust lever in the direction shown by the white arrow in Figure 4-9. If the distance  
measured at the left side is less than that measured at the right side, move the lever in the  
direction shown by the black arrow.  
Notes 1: The carriage guide shaft moves as shown in Figure 4-8. For example, when the  
parallelism adjust lever is moved in the direction of the black arrow, the distance between  
the right side of the platen and printhead nose narrows a little bit.  
Notes 2: The carriage guide shaft moves as shown in Figure 4-8. When the parallelism adjust lever  
is moved in the direction of the black arrow, the distance between the right side of the  
platen and print head nose narrows a little bit.  
Step 14:  
Step 15:  
Step 16:  
Step 17:  
Repeat steps 11 and 12 until the distance between the distance measured at the two positions is  
less than + 0.015 mm.(The #F610 dial gauge matches the + "15" notches.)  
When the distance is within the specified range, tighten the two CP(PS)(M4 X 6) screws securing  
the parallelism adjustment lever. Then measure the distances again, as described in step 11.  
If the distance between the measured distances is within the specified range, apply screw lock to  
the two screws.(Refer to Section 6.2 for lubrication and adhesive application instructions.)  
Go to Section 4.1.6 platen angle adjustment.  
Carriage Guide Shaft Rear  
Parallelism Adjustment Lever  
CP(PS)(M4X6)  
Guide Shaft Holder Lever  
(Right)  
Guide Shaft Holding Spring  
CP(PS)(M4X6)  
CBS(O)(M4X8)  
Carriage Motor Holder  
Figure 4-12. Parallelism Adjustment Lever Operation  
Rev. B  
4-8  
ADJUSTMENT  
4.1.6 Platen Angle Adjustment  
This section describes the platen angle adjustment. The platen must be at a right angle to the carriage  
assembly. This adjustment is required when the platen is removed or replaced or when the two hexagonal  
screws securing the platen to both side frames are loosened. Do not remove the printer mechanism from the  
lower case. (If remove the printer mechanism from the lower case, the adjust value will be out of order when  
you reassemble the printer mechanism to the lower case.) Also, it is necessary to remove the tension roller  
shaft be fore performing this adjustment. (Refer to Section 3.2.6.7)  
CAUTION  
The parallelism is adjusted so that the difference between the distances (from the rear carriage guide  
shaft to the platen measured at the two positions shown in Figure 4-7) is less than + 0.015 mm. Since  
this value is extremely small, you must use the two dial gauges, dial gauge base, and dial gauge  
master supplied by EPSON. Do not adjust the parallelism using any other method.  
;ꢀDial gauge #F610 (Part No. B1019466)  
;Dial gauge base #F611 (Part No. B1019467)  
;Dial gauge master #F612 (Part No. B1019468).  
Step 1: Perform the carriage guide shaft parallelism adjustment. (Refer to section 4.1.5) After the adjustment  
is finished, leave the dial gage unit on the carriage.  
Step 2: Remove the pull tractor sensor.(Refer to Section 3.2.6.10.)  
Step 3: Loosen (but do not remove) the two hexagonal screws securing the platen stay to both side frames.  
H
e
x
a
g
o
n
a
l
S
c
r
e
w
s
(
M
4
P
l
a
t
e
n
S
t
a
y
(
L
)
P
l
a
t
e
n
S
t
a
y
(
R
)
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
i
n
g
T
a
b
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
i
S
i
d
e
F
r
a
m
e
L
S
S
i
d
i
d
e
e
F
r
a
m
e
R
Figure 4-13. Loosing Hexagonal Screws  
4-9  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Step 4: Using the carriage guide shaft gear, attach the both dial gauge needles to the platen surface.(The  
needle doesn’t reach the end of the stroke).  
S
i
d
e
F
r
a
m
e
(
L
)
A
t
t
a
c
h
b
o
t
h
n
e
e
d
l
e
s
.
P
l
a
t
e
n
R
F
e
f
e
r
t
o
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
G
u
i
d
e
S
h
a
i
g
u
r
e
4
-
1
0
a
.
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
g
u
i
d
e
S
h
a
f
t
G
e
a
r
Figure 4-14. Attaching Two Needles to Platen Surface  
Step 5: Measure the angle difference about three position such as figure below.(Using the CR motor  
pulley to move the carriage with the dial gauge toward the right side. See Figure 4-11.)  
Center Position  
70 mm  
70 mm  
Platen  
3 0  
2 0  
3 0  
2 0  
3 0  
2 0  
3 0  
2 0  
3 0  
2 0  
3 0  
2 0  
1 0  
0
1 0  
0
1 0  
0
1 0  
0
1 0  
0
1 0  
0
3 0  
3 0  
1 0 2 0  
3 0  
3 0  
3 0  
3 0  
1 0 2 0  
1 0 2 0  
1 0 2 0  
1 0 2 0  
1 0 2 0  
Figure 4-15. Measuring Angle Difference 1  
4-10  
Rev. B  
ADJUSTMENT  
U
p
B
i
t
A
P
l
a
t
e
n
B
i
t
B
D
o
w
n
(
A
n
g
l
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
M
e
t
h
o
d
)
Figure 4-16. Measuring Angle Difference 2  
Step 6: If the angle difference of two values are more than + 0.015 mm, loosen (but do not remove) the two  
hexagonal screws securing the platen stay to both side frames, then change the platen angle slowlly  
and manually.)  
Step 7: Tighten two hexagonal screws securing the platen stay to both side frames.  
CAUTION  
After perform the adjustment, confirm the value of platen parallelism again. When this value is out of  
order, readjust the platen parallelism and the platen angle adjustment until the value to be correct.  
4-11  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
4.1.7 Platen Gap Motor Value Adjustment  
This section describes how to measure the parameter (ALPHA and BETA values) for the PG mechanism  
unit. Since the ALPHA and BETA values are unique to each mechanism unit, it is written on the label as  
shown in Figures 4-17 and 4-18, so that it can be confirmed at glance. Be sure to perform this measurement  
and correct the value written on the label because the value is necessary when the other units (board,  
printhead) are changed.  
CAUTION  
;This measurement is important because it determines the platen gap, so be sure to use the  
exclusive thickness gauge set and tension gauge.  
Thickness gauge (0.43 mm)  
Thickness gauge (0.80 mm)  
Tension gauge (200 g) : #F545 (EPSON Part No. B765114601)  
;Do not turn the printer off during adjustment.  
When adjusting the platen gap to narrower or wider using the Micro Feed (^) and Micro Feed (v)  
switches, be sure to adjust the gap by 1 step at a time.  
;After perform this adjustment, perform the Bi-Directional adjustment as explained in section 4.1.8.  
P
r
i
n
t
h
e
a
d
S
i
d
e
F
r
a
m
e
(
L
B
E
T
A
V
a
l
u
e
5
m
m
o
r
l
e
s
s
A
L
P
H
A
V
a
l
u
e
P
r
i
n
t
P
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
N
o
.
F
r
a
m
e
(
F
r
o
n
t
)
Figure 4-17. ALPHA Value Print  
Figure 4-18. BETA Values Print  
4-12  
Rev. B  
ADJUSTMENT  
Step 1:  
Step 2:  
Remove the paper, ribbon cartridge, and ribbon mask holder from the printer. Then confirm the  
ALPHA value written on the print head nose.  
Close the top cover.  
ALPHA Value Write Mode :  
Step 3:  
Turn the printer on while pressing the Tear Off, Micro Feed (v), and Front/Rear switches. At this  
time the printer performs PG home position seek. and the carriage moves to the 15 column.  
The panel indicates the current ALPHA adjustment value (Refer to Table 4-1.).  
Write the ALPHA value written on the print head into the memory.  
Step 4:  
Step 5:  
Press the Micro Feed (v) switch to increment value by +1.  
Press the Micro Feed (^) switch to decrement the value by -1.  
Step 6:  
1) When you finish the adjustment (such as you have replaced the print head.), press the LF/FF  
Load SW, then the ALPHA value is written to the EEPROM and finish the adjustment mode.  
Then turn the power off and install the ribbon mask holder and the ribbon cartridge.  
2) When you continue the BETA values write operation, press the Pause SW, then the ALPHA  
value is written to the EEPROM and enter to the BETA values write mode.  
BETA Values Write Mode :  
Step 7:  
Open the top cover and inset the 0.43 mm thickness gauge into the space between the platen  
and the print head nose. (At this time, never shift the print head. If done it, return to Step 3.)  
Contact the tension gauge to the hole of the thickness gauge and pull it straight to the right.  
Hold the thickness gauge gradually with the print head nose by pressing the below switch.  
Press the Micro Feed (v) switch to increment value by +1.  
Step 8:  
Step 9:  
Press the Micro Feed (^) switch to decrement the value by -1.  
The panel indicates the current BETA3’ adjustment value (Refer to Table 4-1.).  
Step 10: Set the BETA3’ value when the tension gauge indicates the 150 (135 - 165) gf, the tension gauge  
can move to right in a degree.  
Step 11:  
Step 12:  
After complete BETA3’ adjustment, press Pause SW to enter next step.  
Close the print head nose to the platen by pressing the below switch.  
Press the Micro Feed (v) switch to increment value by +1.  
Press the Micro Feed (^) switch to decrement the value by -1  
The panel indicates the current BETA2 adjustment value (Refer to Table 4-1.).  
Step 13: After complete BETA2 adjustment, press Pause SW to enter next step.  
Step 14:  
Step 15:  
Inset the 0.43 mm thickness gauge into the space between the platen and the print head nose.  
Hold the thickness gauge gradually with the print head nose by pressing the below switch.  
Press the Micro Feed (v) switch to increment value by +1.  
Press the Micro Feed (^) switch to decrement the value by -1.  
The panel indicates the current BETA3 adjustment value (Refer to Table 4-1.).  
Step 16: After complete BETA3 adjustment, press Pause SW to enter next step.  
Step 17:  
Step 18:  
Inset the 0.80 mm thickness gauge into the space between the platen and the print head nose.  
Hold the thickness gauge gradually with the print head nose by pressing the below switch.  
Press the Micro Feed (v) switch to increment value by +1.  
Press the Micro Feed (^) switch to decrement the value by -1.  
The panel indicates the current BETA4 adjustment value (Refer to Table 4-1.).  
Step 19: After complete BETA4 adjustment, press Pause SW then all of measured BETA values written  
to the EEPROM, and turn the printer power off.  
Note:  
When either the measured BETA values (BETA2, BETA3, and BETA4) are out of range  
(Refer to Table 4-1.) or the below formula is not satisfied, the printer sounds five beeps  
and not written the values to the EEPROM.  
Formula: A1 = 0.43 / (BETA3 - BETA2)  
and  
0.0134 < A1 < 0.0187  
0.0115 < A2 < 0.0195  
A2 = (0.80 - 0.43) / (BETA4 -BETA3) and  
Step 20: Install the ribbon mask holder and the ribbon cartridge.  
4-13  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
P
l
a
t
e
n
T
e
n
s
i
o
n
G
a
u
g
e
1
3
5
-
1
6
5
g
T
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
G
a
u
g
e
(
B
E
T
A
3
'
=
0
.
4
3
m
m
)
Figure 4-19. Thickness Gauge Setting Method  
Table 4-1. BETA Values Adjustment  
Beta No.  
BETA 3'  
BETA 2  
BETA 3  
BETA 4  
Reference Thickness Gauge  
0.43 mm with 150gf pull  
0.00 mm  
Allowed Value Default Value*1)  
-
-
367 - 419  
405 - 437  
418 - 475  
408  
435  
461  
0.43 mm  
0.80 mm  
*1: When EEPROM is reset.  
4-14  
Rev. B  
ADJUSTMENT  
4.1.8 Measurement Seeking and Bi-directional Printing Adjustment  
The purpose of this adjustment is to correct the printer mechanism parameters which control bi-directional  
printing. Be sure to perform this adjustment when required. If this adjustment is not performed correctly, bi-  
directional printing may be miss-aligned, or, in the worst case, the carriage might operate incorrectly. Before  
performing this adjustment, be sure to that the following adjustment are completed correctly.  
4.1.2 Carriage Timing Belt Tension Adjustment  
4.1.5 Carriage Guide Shaft parallelism Adjustment  
4.1.6 Platen Angle Adjustment  
4.1.7 Platen Gap Motor Value Adjustment  
The parameters to be written to the EEPROM on the C204 Main board in this adjustment are as follows:  
1) Measurement seeking  
2) Print head flight time adjustment value  
3) Bi-directional printing alignment value for each speed mode, Super Draft, Draft, and NLQ  
;If the DIP-SW "3-5" is set to the IBM mode (On), it can not perform the Bi-D adjustment. Therefore,  
when you perform the Bi-D adjustment, set the DIP-SW"3-5" to Off.  
;When replace the C204 Main board, the ALPHA and BETA values are not written into the memory  
(In reality, "0" value is installed.) on the Main board. Since this reason, (Since PG is too large) it can  
not print the each current value to the paper. Due to this, Perform the platen gap value adjustment  
before perform this adjustment.  
4-15  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
S
T
A
R
T
M
o
u
n
t
t
h
e
r
i
b
b
o
n
c
a
T
M
u
r
n
t
h
e
p
o
w
e
r
S
W
o
n
i
c
r
o
F
e
e
d
^
a
n
d
M
i
c
T
s
(
h
e
p
r
i
g
n
t
e
r
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
s
c
a
e
e
k
i
n
a
u
t
o
m
a
t
i
c
a
l
l
y
.
I
t
g
o
e
s
t
o
O
N
L
I
N
E
s
t
a
T
u
r
n
t
h
e
p
r
i
n
t
e
r
p
o
E
N
D
Figure 4-20. Carriage Measurement Seeking  
4-16  
Rev. B  
ADJUSTMENT  
S
T
A
R
T
M
o
u
n
t
t
h
e
r
i
b
b
o
n
c
a
r
t
r
i
d
g
e
.
T
M
u
r
n
t
h
e
p
o
w
e
r
S
W
o
n
w
h
i
l
e
p
r
e
W
s
s
i
n
g
T
e
a
r
O
f
f
,
i
c
r
o
F
a
e
e
d
^
,
a
n
d
F
r
o
n
t
/
R
e
a
r
S
s
.
S
a
o
e
t
t
h
e
1
5
"
f
a
n
f
o
l
d
p
a
p
e
r
a
t
F
r
o
n
t
o
r
R
e
a
r
t
r
a
n
r
d
l
o
d
t
h
e
p
a
p
e
r
b
y
p
r
e
s
s
i
n
g
L
F
/
F
F
L
o
a
d
S
W
F
r
o
n
t
/
R
e
a
r
S
W
.
"
P
G
A
l
p
h
a
=
A
A
A
"
i
s
p
r
i
n
t
e
d
.
1
2
3
.
"
P
G
B
e
t
a
1
=
B
B
B
,
P
G
B
e
t
a
2
=
C
C
C
,
P
G
B
e
t
a
3
=
D
D
D
P
G
B
e
t
a
4
=
E
E
E
"
i
s
p
r
i
n
t
e
d
.
.
.
P
"
a
n
e
l
d
i
p
l
a
y
s
t
h
e
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
f
l
i
g
h
t
t
i
m
e
a
d
j
u
s
t
m
(
R
e
f
e
r
t
o
T
a
b
l
e
4
-
2
.
)
.
F
l
i
g
h
t
T
i
m
e
=
F
F
F
"
i
s
p
r
i
n
t
e
d
.
T
t
R
h
e
p
r
i
n
t
e
n
r
t
p
r
i
n
t
s
t
h
e
t
e
s
t
p
r
i
n
t
p
a
t
t
e
r
n
w
i
t
h
h
e
c
u
r
t
r
e
f
l
i
g
h
t
t
i
m
e
s
e
t
t
i
n
g
v
a
l
u
e
.
e
f
e
r
o
F
i
g
u
r
e
4
-
2
2
.
D
o
e
s
t
O
h
e
Y
e
s
o
d
d
(
1
s
t
a
n
d
,
3
r
d
)
a
n
d
e
v
e
n
(
2
n
d
a
n
d
4
t
h
)
l
i
n
e
s
v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l
a
l
i
g
n
m
e
n
t
i
s
K
?
P
r
e
s
s
t
h
e
P
a
u
s
e
S
W
N
o
C
h
a
n
g
e
t
h
e
f
l
i
g
h
t
t
i
m
e
a
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
v
a
l
u
e
.
D
e
c
l
e
m
e
n
t
1
0
s
t
e
p
s
:
T
o
p
o
f
F
o
r
m
S
W
o
n
c
e
.
T
i
h
e
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
f
l
i
g
h
t
o
t
i
m
D
I
I
e
c
l
e
m
e
n
t
1
s
t
e
p
:
P
u
s
h
M
i
c
r
o
F
e
e
d
^
S
W
o
n
c
s
s
t
o
r
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
E
E
P
R
n
n
c
c
l
l
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
1
1
0
s
s
t
p
e
p
s
:
T
e
a
r
O
f
f
S
W
o
n
c
e
.
t
e
:
P
u
s
h
M
i
c
r
o
F
e
e
d
v
S
W
n
c
e
P
a
n
e
l
d
i
p
l
a
y
s
t
h
e
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
f
l
i
g
h
t
t
i
m
e
a
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
G
o
t
o
B
i
-
D
.
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
P
r
e
s
s
t
h
e
C
o
p
y
S
W
.
T
u
r
n
t
h
e
p
r
i
n
t
e
r
p
o
w
E
N
D
Figure 4-21. Flight Time Adjustment  
4-17  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
F
l
i
g
h
t
T
i
m
e
+
X
X
X
4
0
C
O
L
.
5
6
C
O
L
.
4
0
C
O
L
.
Figure 4-22. Test Print Pattern  
Table 4-2. LED indication and Adjustment Value Comparison  
LED*1)  
Off  
+ (positive)  
300  
On*2)  
(negative)  
400  
Ribbon  
(Bi-d. adjustment)  
(PG adjustment)  
Pause  
10  
Top of Form  
Tear Off  
Copy  
20  
30  
40  
Pitch „„†  
„††  
50  
60  
70  
†††  
Font „†  
††  
80  
90  
7 Segment*3)  
0 to 9  
*1) : off, : On  
*2) Indicates 2nd column.  
*3) Indicates 1st column.  
4-18  
Rev. B  
ADJUSTMENT  
B
i
-
D
.
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
M
o
d
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
S
u
p
e
r
D
r
a
f
t
P
r
i
n
t
M
o
d
e
:
1
2
.
.
P
a
n
e
l
d
i
p
l
a
y
s
t
h
e
c
u
r
r
e
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
P
r
i
n
t
e
r
p
r
i
n
t
s
"
S
p
e
e
d
=
B
B
B
*
1
)
i
s
t
h
e
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
a
D
r
a
f
t
P
r
i
n
t
M
o
d
e
:
T
c
h
e
p
r
i
n
t
e
r
p
r
i
n
t
s
t
h
e
t
e
s
u
r
r
e
n
t
a
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
v
a
l
u
e
.
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
D
o
Y
e
s
o
d
d
(
1
s
t
a
n
d
,
3
r
d
)
a
n
d
e
v
N
L
Q
P
r
i
n
t
M
o
d
e
:
4
t
h
)
l
i
n
e
s
v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l
N
o
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
C
P
h
a
n
g
e
t
h
e
B
i
-
D
.
a
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
D
e
c
l
e
m
e
n
t
t
1
0
s
t
e
p
p
s
:
T
o
D
I
I
e
c
l
e
m
e
n
1
s
t
e
:
P
u
s
h
n
n
c
c
l
l
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
1
1
0
s
s
t
p
e
p
s
:
T
e
t
e
:
P
u
s
h
N
o
a
n
e
l
d
i
p
l
a
y
s
t
h
e
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
B
I
s
i
t
f
i
n
i
s
h
e
d
?
Y
e
s
P
r
e
s
s
t
h
e
C
o
p
y
S
W
.
T
u
r
n
t
h
e
p
r
i
n
t
e
r
p
o
w
e
r
o
f
f
.
P
T
i
r
e
s
s
t
h
e
P
a
u
s
e
S
W
.
E
N
D
h
e
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
a
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
s
s
t
o
r
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
E
E
P
R
O
R
e
t
u
r
n
*
1
)
S
p
e
e
d
B
B
d
B
S
D
r
S
p
d
S
u
p
e
r
D
r
a
f
t
r
f
S
p
d
D
N
r
L
a
f
t
N
L
Q
S
p
d
Q
Figure 4-23. Bi-d. Adjustment  
4-19  
Rev. B  
CHAPTER 5  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
5.1 PROBLEM ISOLATION..........................................................................................5-1  
5.2 SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION............................................................................5-2  
5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING ...........................................................................................5-3  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
5.1 TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION  
The information in this chapter makes troubleshooting easier to perform by listing various problems that can  
occur and providing possible solutions.  
Note: For this printer, no special tools are necessary for troubleshooting to the unit level, with the  
exception of a digital multi-meter. Some component-level troubleshooting may require an  
oscilloscope.  
5.1.1 Error Messages  
The DFX-8500 indicates errors using beeps. Table 5-1 lists fatal errors.  
Table 5-1. Fatal Error Information  
Fatal Error  
7-segment Beeper *2)  
LED *1)  
Description  
Note*3)  
CR motor  
circuit  
shortage error  
1
2
3
-
Auto power off  
after 12 seconds  
The isolation resistance in the CR  
motor is too low.  
Cutter error  
- -  
- - -  
Auto power off  
after 12 seconds  
Optional cutter cable is not connected  
firmly.  
Optional cutter is defective.  
The PG home sensor is broken.  
The PG motor is broken.  
The parallelism adjustment is  
incorrect.  
Platen gap  
error  
Auto power off  
after 12 seconds  
PG adjustment values are incorrect.  
PG backlash is too tight.  
The carriage is locked.  
The interlock switch doesn’t close  
exactly.  
Carriage lock  
error  
4
- - - -  
Auto power off  
after 12 seconds  
The parallelism adjustment is  
incorrect.  
PG adjustment values are incorrect.  
PW sensor is defective.  
The CR motor is defective.  
The CR encoder sensor is defective.  
The head fan driver IC is shorted.  
The head fan of the print head is  
defective.  
Carriage load  
measurement  
error  
6
7
- - - - - -  
Auto power off  
after 12 seconds  
Head fan error  
- - - - - - -  
Head power off  
immediately  
Head circuit  
shortage error  
RAM check  
error  
Paper memory  
setting error  
EEPROM data  
compare error  
Tractor change  
error  
8
9
a
b
c
d
- - - - - - - -  
Head power off  
immediately  
Auto power off  
The print head driver IC is shorted.  
The coil of the print head is defective.  
DRAM of C204 MAIN board is  
defective.  
- - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - -  
after 12 seconds  
-
-
EEPROM on the C204 MAIN board  
is defective.  
Tractor select mechanism is  
defective.  
- - - - - - - - - - -  
-
Auto power off  
after 12 seconds  
Auto power off  
after 12 seconds  
Watch dog  
error  
C205 MAIN board has trouble.  
Note 1: The 7 segment LED indicates error No. and “E” alternately.  
Note 2: The descriptions “.”and “-“ show how the beeper sounds.  
“.”: Beeper sounds 100 ms and interval is 100 ms.  
“-“ : Beeper sounds 500 ms and interval is 100 ms.  
Note 3: Turn the printer power off while the 7 segment LED are on, or the printer shuts power  
down automatically. You can’t turn the printer back on for 5 minutes after the printer shuts  
power down automatically  
5-1  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
5.1.2 Bypassing Interlock Switch and Cover Open Sensor  
To print with the top cover open or removed, you need to bypass the interlock switch and cover open sensor  
because these sensors automatically disable printing when the top cover is open.  
C
S
o
v
e
r
O
p
e
n
e
n
s
o
r
R
W
e
d
:
3
-
p
i
n
I
n
t
e
r
l
o
c
k
S
W
.
h
i
t
e
:
2
-
p
i
n
C
J
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
B
o
a
r
d
C
2
0
4
M
A
I
N
B
o
a
r
d
C
N
3
Figure 5-1. Interlock Switch Assembly Location  
The interlock switch and cover open sensor consists of an assembly. To bypass the interlock switch and the  
cover open sensor,  
1. remove the left side cover,  
2. make the short circuit connectors for the interlock switch and cover open sensor connectors,  
3. insert the short circuit connectors for the interlock switch and cover open sensor connectors.  
W
h
i
t
e
:
2
-
p
i
n
S
C
h
o
r
t
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
C
J
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
B
o
a
r
d
C
2
0
4
M
A
I
N
B
o
a
r
d
C
N
3
Figure 5-2. Bypassing Interlock Switch and Cover Open Sensor  
5-2  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
5.1.3 Coil Resistance  
The following table provides the coil resistance for the motor, head fan, plunger, and printhead.  
Table 5-2. Motor, Fan, Plunger, and Printhead Coil Resistance  
Part  
Coil Resistance  
CR motor  
PF motor  
RF motor  
PG motor  
Head fan  
Plunger  
1.66 ohms + 10 %  
2.80 ohms + 10 % at 25oC  
150 ohms + 10 % at 25oC  
250 ohms + 18 ohms at 25oC  
61 ohms + 4.3 ohms at 25oC  
9 ohms + 5 % at 25oC  
Printhead  
2.93 ohms + 0.2 ohms at 25oC  
Shield Cable  
Double-sided Adhesive Tape  
C
Head FPC  
B
A
2
1
3
4
5
Head Cable  
Protection Sheet  
Head Cable Board  
Figure 5-3. Disconnect Printhead FPC  
5-3  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
FPC A  
FPC B  
FPC C  
Load Pattern  
MA : Fan motor phase A  
MB : Fan motor phase B  
MC : Fan motor common  
MT : Fan motor thermistor  
: Head coil GND side  
: Head coil P/S side  
: Head thermistor  
PWD : Paper width sensor  
+5V : +5 VDC  
ENCA: Encoder A  
GND : GND  
P/S : Power supply (+37 VDC)  
ENCB: Encoder B  
HT : Head thermistor  
Figure 5-4. Printhead Coil Resistance  
5-4  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
1. The printer does not operate when power is turned on.  
START  
D
oe  
nte  
befo  
s
r
the  
beep  
N
o
C
C
heck Tab  
ode  
l
e 5  
-1,  
E
rr  
o
r
p
ri  
s
.
r
e
i
t d  
i
e
s
?
Y
es  
I
s
the  
N
o
s
Use the  
c
o
rr  
e
c
t
A
C v  
o
l
tage.  
A
C
i
nput voltage  
no  
rmal?  
Y
es  
Replace the fuse F1 and  
disconnect CN2, CN3, and  
CN4 on the C204 power  
supply Board.  
H
a
s
C
boa  
fu  
s
e F1  
po  
Y
e
on the  
upp  
wer  
204  
s
l
y
rd blown?  
Reconnect CN2,  
N
o
I
s
the  
ob  
ed?  
CN3, and CN4  
and turn on the  
printer.  
N
o
p
r
i
l
e
m
f
x
W
hen  
n on po  
aga n, doe  
ne  
you  
wer  
N
o
tu  
r
Y
es  
M
ea  
s
u
re the output  
v
o
l
tage f  
rom  
i
s
e a  
the  
s
the  
po  
w
e
r
s
upp  
l
y
boa d.  
r
w
fu  
s
l
o
C
204  
END  
b
l
o
w
?
Y
es  
I
s
the  
N
o
output  
no  
v
o
a
l
l
tage  
R
boa  
ep  
rd.  
l
a
c
e the  
C
po  
w
e
r
s
upply  
204  
r
m
?
Y
e
s
C
heck  
a
ll  
m
oto  
rs  
,
s
o
l
eno  
i
d, p  
ri  
nthead,  
R
etest  
and d  
r
i
v
e
rs  
u
s
i
ng a  
m
u
l
t
i
m
ete  
r.  
A
th  
r
r
i
e the  
y
R
ep  
nthead. If d  
ep e at the  
l
a
c
e bad  
m
oto  
r
r
e t  
,
s
o
s
m
l
o
eno  
i
d, o  
r
N
o
w
i
n no  
rmal  
p
r
i
ri  
v
m
e
a
l
i
s
bad,  
ange?  
r
l
a
c
s
a
i
e.  
Y
e
s
I
c
s
o
the  
rr  
N
o
Replace the C204 MAIN board,  
C204 DRV board, and/or  
C204 DRV-B board.  
fau  
l
t
e
c
ted?  
Y
es  
E
ND  
N
o
I
c
s
o
the  
rr  
fau  
l
t
e
c
ted?  
Y
e
s
S
ee  
Section 5.3 to  
repa  
i
r
the p  
ri  
nte  
r
m
e
c
hanism  
.
E
ND  
5-5  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
2. Carriage operation is abnormal.  
S
TART  
A
r
e
t
he  
li  
1
connec  
N
t
o
r
s
s
t
ed  
in  
N
o
OT  
E
R
einsert the connectors.  
inserted securely?  
Y
es  
N
o
I
s
t
he  
f
au  
lt  
correc  
t
ed?  
Y
es  
END  
M
anuall  
carr age  
ove en  
y
m
ove  
o see  
s s ooth  
the  
N
o
t
smooth  
i
m
t
if  
m
t
i
m
o
r
not.  
S
mooth  
R
e
f
e
r
t
P
m
o
r
t
i
on 5  
echan  
necessary.  
.
3
,
Repair  
ism.  
o
f the  
e
M
i
P
r
f
o
r
r
C
m
heck the  
CR  
o
t
o
r
and CR  
Y
es  
mo  
t
o
r
d
r
i
ve  
r
s us  
i
ng  
a
m
u
O
l
t
im  
eter.  
K?  
N
o
I
s
t
he  
N
o
f
au  
lt  
correc  
t
ed?  
If the  
mo  
t
o
r
i
s bad  
,
r
ep  
lace.  
If  
d
r
i
ve  
m
r
s a  
r
e bad  
,
r
ep  
lace at  
Y
es  
t
he sa  
e
t
ime.  
Yes  
I
s
t
he  
f
au  
l
t
corrected?  
END  
N
o
Replace the C204 MAIN board and/or  
C204 DRV board.  
Check the following connectors:  
NOTE 1:  
Junction board connector to interlock switch  
Junction board connector to CR motor  
Head junction board connectors to printhead  
END  
CN4 of C204 MAIN board to head junction board  
5-6  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
3. Carriage operation is normal, but the self-test is printed incorrectly (1/3).  
S
T
A
R
s
T
P
e
rfo  
r
m
the  
elf-test.  
Does the  
printer perform  
self-test ?  
N
o
Y
es  
N
o
A
re the  
c
onnectors  
li  
s
e
i
n
N
O
T
E
1
i
n
s
securely?  
Is there  
any dot missing  
or dragging ?  
Y
es  
Reinsert correctly.  
Y
es  
N
o
I
c
s
o
the  
rr  
N
o
fau  
l
t
e
c
ted?  
Y
es  
C
heck  
ont nu  
nthead p  
p
r
y
i
nthead  
ually check  
ep  
cable  
c
p
i
i
t
.
Vis  
r
i
i
n
s
.
R
lace  
E
ND  
an  
y
bad pa  
r
t.  
Y
es  
I
c
s
o
the  
rr  
fau  
l
t
e
c
ted?  
N
o
P
e
r
fo  
i
r
m
the bidirectional  
p
r
i
nt ng ad  
j
u
s
t
m
ent.  
A
E
ND  
Check the following connectors:  
NOTE 1:  
Three head junction board connectors to printhead  
CN1 of C204 MAIN board to head junction board  
CN2 of C204 MAIN board to C204 DRV-B board  
CN1 of C204 DRV-B board to printer mechanism  
5-7  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
3. Carriage operation is normal, but the self-test is printed incorrectly (2/3).  
A
Replace the C204 MAIN and./or  
C204 DRV-B board.  
Check the print head  
coil resistance.  
N
o
Is  
the  
p
r
in  
t
head  
resistance  
c
o
rrect?  
Yes  
C
heck  
the p  
r
i
n
t
head d  
r
iv  
e
r
s
.
C
heck the printhead drivers.  
If the p  
r
i
n
r
t
head d  
ep  
head  
rivers  
the  
N
o
A
r
e
the  
a
p
r
r
e
O
t
K,  
l
a
c
e
d
r
i
v
e
r
s
OK?  
i
n
.
If the p  
r
i
n
r
t
head d  
ep  
head  
rivers  
the  
N
o
A
r
the  
OK?  
a
p
r
e
n
O
t
K,  
l
a
c
e
Yes  
d
r
iv  
e
ri  
.
Replace the C204 MAIN and./or  
C204 DRV-B board.  
Yes  
Replace the C204 MAIN and./or  
.
C204 DRV-B board.  
I
s
n
N
o
the p  
r
i
t
O
Y
K?  
Yes  
P
ri  
n
t
OK?  
e
s
N
o
E
ND  
R
e
f
e
r
t
r
o
M
S
e
e
c
c
han  
tion 5  
.
3
,
R
epa  
i
r
of the  
Pr  
i
n
te  
ism.  
f
r
t
r
o
M
S
e
e
c
c
han  
tion 5  
.
3
R
epa  
i
r
of the  
ism.  
B
B
5-8  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
3. Carriage operation is normal, but the self-test is printed incorrectly (3/3).  
B
Y
es  
I
s
the p  
r
i
nt  
c
o
rrec  
t?  
P
ad  
e
r
fo  
r
m
bidirectional  
N
o
justment.  
G
o back to  
of the nte  
heck fo othe  
S
r
e
M
r
c
t
e
p
i
on 5.3  
R
epa  
ir  
P
r
r
i
c
han  
ism, and  
m
c
rob  
l
e
s
.
E
ND  
P
e
rfo  
r
m
bidirectional  
ad  
justment.  
E
ND  
5-9  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
4. Printing is normal, but paper feeding is abnormal.  
S
TART  
I
s
r
the  
oaded  
No  
pape  
l
c
orrectly?  
Load the pape  
r
c
o
rre  
c
t
l
y
.
Y
es  
W
hen  
e the  
anuall , doe  
ooth  
No  
y
oto  
m
m
o
v
PF  
R
P
efe  
r
to  
r
S
e
c
c
han  
t
i
on 5.3  
R
epa of the  
i
r
m
y
s
it  
ri  
nte  
M
e
i
s
m.  
e
s
m
ly?  
Y
es  
I
s
P
r
F
c
Y
es  
m
oto  
o
il  
C
heck the  
il and  
r
e
s
i
s
tan  
c
e of the  
P
r
F
d
m
rivers  
oto  
r
.
r
e
c
s
o
i
rr  
s
tan  
c
e
c
o
s
c
heck the  
P
F
m
oto  
e
c
t?  
A
r
r
e the  
s sho  
open?  
N
o
d
ri  
v
e
r
ted o  
r
I
e
s
s
the  
tan  
e the d  
N
o
A
r
e the  
m
and a  
otor r  
i
s
c
e
OK  
Y
e
s
d
ri  
v
e
r
s shorted or  
open?  
r
ri  
v
e
rs  
N
o
O
K?  
Y
es  
Y
es  
Replace the  
C204 MAIN board and/or  
C204 DRV board.  
Replace the  
C204 DRV board  
and the PF motor.  
R
P
ep  
l
a
c
e the  
R
efe  
r
to  
S
e
e
c
c
han  
t
i
on 5.5,  
R
epa  
i
l
r
of the  
F
motor.  
P
r
i
nte  
r
M
i
s
m
.
P
e
rfo  
rm  
f
i
na  
l
p
r
i
nt  
i
ng of  
s
e
f
-test.  
P
e
rfo  
rm  
f
i
na  
I
l
p
r
i
nt  
i
ng of  
self-test.  
N
o
I
s
the  
Y
es  
s
the  
p
r
i
nt  
OK?  
p
ri  
nt  
OK?  
E
ND  
N
o
E
ND  
R
of the  
efe  
r
to  
S
e
c
r
t
i
on 5.3  
han  
R
epair  
R
efe  
and pe  
oto back  
ad  
r
to  
C
r
hapte  
r
4
P
r
i
nte  
M
e
c
i
sm.  
rfo  
m
the  
PG  
m
r
lash  
j
u
s
t
m
ent.  
N
o
I
s
the  
p
ri  
nt  
OK?  
E
ND  
R
efe  
the  
ad  
r
to  
m
C
hapte  
r
r
4 and perform  
P
G
t
oto backlash  
E
ND  
j
u
s
m
ent.  
E
ND  
5-10  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
5. Panel unit operation is abnormal.  
S
TART  
Is CN5  
between the C204 MAIN  
and C204 PNL board  
connected correctly?  
N
o
5
connector CN  
orrectly.  
R
c
e
i
n
s
e
rt  
Y
es  
N
o
I
c
s
o
the  
rr  
Y
es  
fau  
l
t
e
c
ted?  
Us  
the sw  
204  
i
ng a  
m
u
l
t
i
m
ete  
on the  
d.  
r
,
check  
E
ND  
i
t
N
c
hes  
L boa  
C
P
r
D
o the  
hes w  
rr  
Y
es  
sw  
i
t
c
ork  
?
c
o
e
c
t
l
y
R
ep  
l
a
c
e the  
C
204  
MA  
I
N
boa  
r
d.  
N
o
Y
e
s
204  
R
ep  
l
a
c
e the  
C
PNL board.  
I
c
s
o
the  
rr  
fau  
l
t
e
c
ted?  
E
ND  
N
o
N
o
D
o the  
buttons w  
o
rk?  
204  
R
ep  
l
a
c
e the  
C
PNL board.  
Y
e
s
E
ND  
E
ND  
R
ep  
l
a
c
e the  
C
204  
MA  
I
N
board.  
E
ND  
5-11  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
6. Data sent by the host computer is printed incorrectly.  
Note : The flowchart below assumes the host computer is operating normally.  
STA  
RT  
R
un  
t
he  
self-test.  
I
s
n
t
he  
s
e
rr  
l
f
-
e
t
e
c
s
t
p
r
i
t
ed  
c
o
t
ly  
?
N
o
Y
es  
Troub  
l
e
s
s
hoo  
flowchar  
t
p
r
i
n
t
t
e
s
r
.
u
s
ing the  
p
r
e
v
iou  
B
u
ilt  
-
in  
P
a
r
a
lle  
l
W
h
ic  
h
I/  
F
a
r
e
y
ou using?  
S
e
r
i
a
l
o
r
C
heck  
t
he  
c
s
ab  
l
o
e
c
m
onne  
pu  
ction  
ter.  
O
p
t
iona  
l
f
r
o
m
t
he ho  
t
c
Are the DIP  
switches set correctly?  
(See Tables 1-16,1-21,  
1-22,and 1-23.)  
N
o
S
e
rr  
t
s
e
witches  
ctly.  
Is  
c
o
your parallel cable is a  
shielded, twisted-pair cable  
less than 2 m, and does it  
work with another  
Y
es  
N
o
E
ND  
If  
e u  
I/  
e a null  
y
s
F
ou  
printer?  
a
r
i
ng a  
s you  
ode  
N
o
s
ab  
e
l
r
i
a
l
,
i
r
m
Y
es  
c
m
c
ab  
le?  
204  
C
R
ep  
l
a
c
e
M
A
I
N
board.  
R
ep  
l
a
c
e
cable.  
Y
es  
R
ep  
la  
c
e
C
204  
M
A
I
N
board.  
E
ND  
E
ND  
E
ND  
N
o
t
u
s
i
ng  
s
e
s
r
i
a
l
.
If  
i
y
ou a  
r
e
u
l
ng a  
I/  
he ne  
T
r
y
pe  
B
N
o
op  
t
t
i
ona  
F
f
o
a ne  
k con  
t
w
o
r
r
k
,
is  
t
w
o
r
f
i
gu  
ed  
c
orrectly?  
R
econfigure network.  
Y
es  
R
ep  
l
a
c
e
T
y
pe  
B
in  
t
erface.  
E
ND  
E
ND  
5-12  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
5.2 CIRCUIT BOARD REPAIR  
This section provides detailed troubleshooting methods to isolate components in the power supply or on the  
main board. This information is for use by service personnel who repair to the component level.  
The table below provides causes, checkpoints, and solutions for different power supply circuit problems. The  
checkpoints include waveforms for normal operation. By referring to the checkpoints, determine the defective  
component. Then perform the proper repair. The table provides the following four columns:  
Symptom:  
Cause:  
Checkpoint:  
Solution:  
Check this column for a list of common printer problems.  
Use this column to identify possible causes that could produce this symptom.  
Follow the troubleshooting checks in this column to isolate your problem.<  
Repair the printer using the instructions in this column.  
5.2.1 C204 PSB/PSE Board Repair  
Table 5-4 indicates majour components which is used for the C204 PSB/PSE board and Table 5-4 shows the  
C204 PSB/PSE board component level troubleshooting.  
Table 5-4. C204 PSB/PSE Board Main Parts List  
Location  
DB1  
Description  
Diode bridge  
TY1  
TRIAC  
QF101  
QF201  
IC101  
IC204  
Switching FET for VP1 and VP2  
Switching FET for VP3 and +5 VDC  
PWM switching controller  
+5 V regulator IC  
Table 5-5. C204 PSB/PSE Board Component Repair 1/3  
Cause Checkpoint  
No DC voltage is present PD signal is HIGH (sent Measure the signal level Wait until the printer  
Symptom  
Solution  
at the output . (Fan on from the main board).  
the power supply board  
doesn’t rotate at all.)  
of the PD signal at CN4.  
prints again.  
Replace the E05B36 on  
the C204 MAIN board.  
The DRERR signal is Measure the signal level Replace the printhead  
HIGH.  
of the DRERR signal at driver on the C204 MAIN  
CN4.  
board and/or C204 DRV-  
B board.  
CL signal is HIGH.  
Measure the signal level Wait until the printer  
of the CL signal at CN4.  
prints again.  
Replace the E05B36 on  
the C204 MAIN board.  
Fuse  
F1  
blows The line filter circuit is Check if any of pins Replace the abnormal  
immediately  
replacement.  
after defective.  
C1-C5 or R1 is shorting element.  
the AC line.  
5-13  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Symptom  
The +37 VDC (VP1 /  
VP2) line is dead.  
Table 5-5. C204 PSB/PSE Board Component Repair 2/3  
Cause Checkpoint  
The main switching FETs Observe the voltage  
Solution  
Replace QF101.  
QF101 is defective.  
waveform between the  
drain side and GND.  
IC101 is defective.  
Pin 5 (FB) must be HIGH Replace IC101.  
then observe the voltage  
waveform between pin 2  
(VOUT) and pin 12  
(GND) of IC101.  
The +37 VDC (VP3) line  
is dead.  
The main switching FETs Observe the voltage  
Replace QF201.  
Replace Q201.  
Replace Q202.  
QF201 is defective.  
waveform between the  
drain side and GND.  
Observe the voltage  
waveform between the  
collector side and GND.  
Observe the voltage  
waveform between the  
collector side and GND.  
Q201 is defective.  
Q202 is defective.  
5-14  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Table 5-5. C204 PSB/PSE Board Component Repair 3/3  
Symptom  
The 5 VDC line is  
defective.  
Cause  
IC204 is defective.  
Checkpoint  
Check the voltage level at pin 10 (V1)  
and pin5 (GP).  
Solution  
Replace IC204.  
Observe the drive waveform at pin 8  
(VO) and pin 5 (GP).  
Replace IC204 or  
ZD211.  
37 VDC line  
(VP1/VP2) is  
abnormal.  
IC102 is defective. (If  
this IC is defective, it  
cannot monitor the 37 less than 1.3 VDC, the comparator  
When the input voltage of the minus  
port (pin 6 for VP1 and pin2 for VP2) is  
Replace IC203.  
VDC lines, and  
outputs a HIGH signal.  
printing operation  
becomes abnormal.),  
37 VDC line (VP3) IC203 is defective. (If  
When the input voltage of the plus port  
is bigger than 1.3 VDC, the comparator  
Replace IC203.  
is abnormal.  
this IC is defective, it  
cannot monitor the 37 outputs a HIGH signal.  
VDC lines, and motor  
operations become  
abnormal.),  
5-15  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
5.2.2 C204 MAIN/DRV/DRV-B Boards Repair  
Table 5-6 indicates major components which is used for the C204 MAIN/DRV/DRV-B boards and Table 5-7  
shows the C204 MAIN/DRV/DRV-B boards component level troubleshooting.  
Table 5-6. C204 MAIN/DRV/DRV-B boards Component Repair 1/7  
Symptom  
The printer does  
not operate at all.  
Cause  
Checkpoint  
Check the logic level of the DRERR  
signal at CN10 or check the VP1 and  
VP2 voltage.  
Solution  
The DRERR signal  
was sent to the C204  
power supply board  
(HIGH level turns off  
the power supply).  
The PD signal was  
sent to the C204  
power supply board.  
(HIGH level turns off  
the power supply)  
Replace the head  
driver on the C204  
MAIN board (VP1)  
or C204 DRV-B  
board (VP2).  
Check the logic level of the PD signal  
during power on and verify the voltage  
waveform for the head driver. (Refer to  
the head driver waveform figure,  
above.)  
Replace the head  
driver or gate array.  
The reset circuit is not Check the logic level at pin1 (VOUT) of Replace IC13.  
operational (for logic). IC13.  
The driver circuits The pull up voltage  
When the collector of Q15 is high  
Check the logic level at collector of Q14  
(VX) (When the collector of Q15 is  
high, VX is HIGH..  
Replace Q15.  
don’t operate at  
all.  
VX is not generated.  
Serial interface is  
dead.  
The level converter IC Check the signal level change between Replace IC9.  
is defective. in and out port of the IC9.  
5-16  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Table 5-6. C204 MAIN/DRV/DRV-B boards Component Repair 2/7  
Symptom  
The printer does  
not operate at all.  
Cause  
The control ROM is  
defective.  
Checkpoint  
Confirm that the PROM is inserted the  
socket correctly.  
Solution  
Replace IC5.  
The gate array (IC1)  
is defective.  
The CPU (IC2) is  
defective  
Check pin 86 (D0)of IC1 for a change  
in the signal (HIGH or LOW).  
Look at the oscillator at either pin 27  
(x1) or pin 28 of the CPU.  
Replace IC1.  
Replace CRU1 or  
IC1  
The DRAM (IC14) is  
defective  
Observe pin 2 (D0) of IC14 for a  
change in the signal (HIGH or LOW).  
Replace IC14.  
5-17  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Symptom  
The carriage  
operates  
Table 5-6. C204 MAIN/DRV/DRV-B boards Component Repair 3/7  
Cause  
IC1 on the C204  
MAIN board is  
defective.  
Q16, Q17, Q18, or  
Q19 on the C204  
MAIN board is  
defective.  
Checkpoint  
Solution  
Check the signals for the carriage  
motor phases at pins 204 (CRA), 205  
(CRB), 206 (CRC), and 5 (CRD) of IC1  
Check the signals for the carriage  
Replace IC1.  
abnormally.  
Replace Q16, Q17,  
motor phases at collectors Q16 (CRA), Q18, or Q19.  
Q17 (CRB), Q18 (CRC), and Q19  
(CRD).  
IC1 is doesn’t work.  
Check the voltage level between Anode Replace ZD2, Q34,  
and Kathode of ZD2 is APPROX. 6.2 V. or Q35.  
IC1 on the C204 DRV Check the signals for the carriage  
Replace IC1.  
board is defective.  
motor phases at pins 14 (IN_A) and 10  
(OUT1) of IC1..  
.
Measure the voltage level at pins 10  
(OUT1) and 5 (GP) of IC1 when the  
carriage is operating. (The normal  
voltage level is approximately 37  
VDC.),  
Replace IC1.  
IC3 on the C204 DRV Observe the waveform at pin 1 of IC3.  
board is defective.  
Replace IC3.  
5-18  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Table 5-6. C204 MAIN/DRV/DRV-B boards Component Repair 4/7  
Cause Checkpoint  
The carriage encoder Observe the carriage encoder sensor  
Symptom  
The carriage  
operates  
Solution  
Replace the  
sensor is defective.  
output signal at pins 4 (ENCA) and 3  
(ENCB) of CN4 on the C204 MAIN  
board.  
carriage encoder  
sensor.  
abnormally.  
Carriage operation is  
unstable (due to a  
Check the switching waveform for Q5,  
Q6, and Q7.  
Replace the  
abnormal transistor.  
lack of motor torque).  
5-19  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Symptom  
Paper feeding is  
abnormal.  
Table 5-6. C204 MAIN/DRV/DRV-B boards Component Repair 5/7  
Cause  
Checkpoint  
Check the PF motor phase drive  
signals at pins 2 - 5 of IC2.  
Solution  
The CPU IC2) on the  
C204 MAIN board is  
defective.  
Replace IC2.  
IC2 on the C204 DRV At IC2, check the output signals for  
Replace IC2.  
Replace IC2.  
board is defective.  
pins 2 (OUT_A), 3 (OUTXA), 6  
(OUT_B), and 7 (OUTXB).  
Check the RF motor phase drive  
signals at pins 6 - 9 of IC2.  
Ribbon feeding is  
abnormal.  
The CPU IC2) on the  
C204 MAIN board is  
defective.  
The common  
Check the collector voltage of Q21.  
Replace Q20 or  
Q21.  
switching transistor on  
the C204 DRV board  
is defective.  
The phase switching  
For transistors Q22 - Q25, observe the if there is no output  
transistor on the C204 input signal from the CPU (base) and  
signal, replace the  
abnormal transistor.  
DRV board is  
defective.  
the output signal (collector).  
Fuse F1 on the C204  
DRV board is  
defective.  
Check if fuse F1 is defective.  
Replace F1.  
5-20  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Table 5-6. C204 MAIN/DRV/DRV-B boards Component Repair 6/7  
Symptom  
The head fan  
operation is  
abnormal.  
Cause  
IC1 on the C204  
MAIN board is  
defective.  
Checkpoint  
Solution  
Replace IC1.  
Observe the PG motor phase signal at  
pins 163 (FANA) and 164 (FANAX) of  
IC1.  
Q10 or Q11 on the  
C204 MAIN board is  
defective.  
Observe the head fan phase drive  
voltage level for pins 25 (HFANA) and  
17 (HFANB) of CN1. (The normal  
voltage is approximately 37 VDC.)  
Observe the PG motor phase signal at  
pins 10 (PGA), 12 (PGB), 14 (PGAX),  
and 13 (PGBX) of IC1.  
Replace Q10 or  
Q11.  
The PG motor  
operates  
abnormally.  
IC1 on the C204  
MAIN board is  
defective.  
Replace IC1.  
The common  
Check the collector voltage of Q11.  
Replace Q10 or  
Q11.  
switching transistor on  
the C204 DRV board  
is defective.  
The phase switching  
For transistors Q12 - Q15, observe the if there is no output  
transistor on the C204 output signal (collector).  
DRV board is  
defective.  
signal, replace the  
abnormal transistor.  
Fuse F2 on the C204  
DRV board is  
defective.  
Check if fuse F2 is defective.  
Replace F2.  
The PG sensor is  
defective.  
Observe the PG sensor output signal at Replace the PG  
pins 35 (PGENCA) and 34 (PGENCB)  
of CN14.  
sensor.  
The PG home  
position sensor is  
defective.  
Observe the PG HP sensor signal level Replace the PG  
for pin 36 (PGHOME) of CN14.  
(PG home = LOW level; other = HIGH  
level.)  
home position  
sensor.  
The plunger is  
defective.  
Fuse F3 is defective  
Check if fuse F3 is defective.  
Replace F3.  
Replace IC1.  
IC1 on the C204  
MAIN board is  
defective.  
When paper is loaded into the printer,  
look at the switching signal at pins 16  
(PLP) and 17 (PLN)of IC1.  
Plunger drive  
transistor on the C204 paper loading.  
DRV board is  
Observe the Q31 collector voltage at  
Replace Q31, Q30,  
or Q32.  
defective.  
5-21  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Table 5-6. C204 MAIN/DRV/DRV-B boards Component Repair 7/7  
Symptom  
The self-test is  
printed incorrectly MAIN board is  
defective.  
Cause  
IC1 on the C204  
Checkpoint  
Observe the output signal at pins 136-  
181 of IC1.  
Solution  
Replace IC1.  
The head driver FETs Observe the voltage waveform at the  
Replace the  
on the C204 MAIN  
and/or C204 DRV-B  
boards are defective.  
each FET drain side.  
abnormal FET.  
The CPU (IC2) on the Observe the signals at pins 38 (PTS1)  
Replace the IC2.  
C204 MAIN board is  
defective.  
and 42 (PTS2) of the IC2  
5-22  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
5.2.3 Printer Mechanism Repair  
The table below describes how to isolate problems with the printer mechanism. To replace or adjust printer  
mechanism parts, refer to Chapter 3, Disassembly and Assembly, and Chapter 4, Adjustments. If a  
symptom recurs following a repair attempt, look for other possible causes and solutions in the table below.  
Table 5-7. Printer Mechanism Repair 1/4  
Symptom  
The CR motor  
does not operate.  
Cause  
Checkpoint  
Solution  
The transport locking  
bracket (used to hold  
the carriage in place  
when the printer is  
moved) has not been  
removed.  
Verify that the transport locking bracket Remove bracket.  
has been removed.  
(Refer to Section  
3.1.)  
Foreign objects are  
Manually move the carriage to see if  
Remove any foreign  
objects.  
lodged in the gears or the motor rotates.  
elsewhere (e.g. paper  
dust on the carriage  
encoder belt) in the  
mechanism.  
The CR motor is  
defective.  
Measure the coil resistance of the CR  
motor. It should be approximately 1.66 motor.  
Replace the CR  
ohms + 10 %.  
The carriage timing  
belt is defective.  
Manually check the carriage timing belt Perform the carriage  
tension.  
timing belt tension  
adjustment, as  
described in Section  
4.1.2.  
The carriage guide  
shaft parallelism  
value is incorrect.  
Check whether the carriage moves  
smoothly when moved manually.  
(Check that foreign objects are not  
lodged in the printer mechanism.),  
Perform the carriage  
guide shaft  
parallelism  
adjustment, as  
described in Section  
4.1.5.  
The CR encoder  
sensor is defective.  
The carriage encoder Check the encoder belt (below the  
belt is damaged or  
covered with dust.  
The printhead FPC  
common wires are  
broken.  
Check the waveform for the carriage  
encoder signal. (Refer to Table 5-6.),  
Replace the CR  
encoder sensor.  
Replace or clean the  
carriage encoder  
belt.  
carriage timing belt).  
The carriage  
moves, but no  
printing is  
Check the continuity of the common  
wires for the printhead FPC.  
Replace the FPC.  
performed.  
5-23  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Symptom  
A particular dot  
does not print.  
Table 5-7. Printer Mechanism Repair 2/4  
Cause  
Checkpoint  
Solution  
Replace the  
printhead.  
Replace the  
printhead.  
Replace the  
printhead.  
The printhead is  
defective.  
Measure the printhead coil resistance.  
(Refer to Figure 5-4 for details.)  
Check whether a dot wire is worn.  
The print is too  
light or print  
density is not  
uniform.  
The printhead is  
defective.  
Check if the tip of a dot wire is worn.  
The parallelism value Print density differs at the right and left Perform the  
is incorrect.  
sides of the page (darker on one side  
than the other).  
parallelism  
adjustment, as  
described in Section  
4.1.5.  
The platen gap value  
is incorrect.  
Print density is too light even the new  
ribbon cartridge is mounted.  
Perform the  
parallelism  
adjustment, as  
described in Section  
4.1.5.  
Printing is  
Foreign objects are  
Visually check the paper path.  
Remove any foreign  
substances.  
performed, but the lodged in the paper  
printer does not  
feed paper or  
does not feed it  
correctly.  
path.  
The PF motor is not  
driving the gear  
properly.  
Check whether the PF motor pinion  
gear rotates smoothly when rotated  
manually  
Check backlash  
between PF motor  
pinion gear and  
paper feed reduction  
gear.  
The PF motor is  
defective.  
Measure coil resistance for the PF  
motor. (The correct resistance is  
approximately 2.8 ohms + 10%.) Also  
check the PF motor drivers.  
Replace the PF  
motor, and if drivers  
are bad, replace  
main board at the  
same time  
The ribbon feed  
(RF) motor does  
not operate.  
The ribbon cartridge  
is defective.  
Remove the ribbon cartridge, rotate it,  
and check whether it feeds the ribbon  
normally.  
Replace the ribbon  
cartridge.  
Foreign objects are  
caught in the gears.  
Check whether the ribbon driving gear  
rotates when the cartridge is moved  
manually.  
Remove any foreign  
objects or replace  
damaged ribbon  
feed mechanism  
part (the ribbon feed  
select gear, ribbon  
feed transmission  
gear, or ribbon feed  
gear).  
..  
5-24  
Rev. B  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Table 5-7. Printer Mechanism Repair 3/4  
Symptom  
The RF motor  
does not operate.  
Cause  
Checkpoint  
Solution  
Perform the  
parallelism  
adjustment, as  
described in Section  
4.1.5.  
The parallelism value Check whether the carriage moves  
is incorrect.  
smoothly when moved manually.  
(Check that foreign objects are not  
lodged in the printer mechanism.)  
The RF motor  
does not operate.  
The RF motor is  
defective.  
Check the coil resistance of the RF  
motor. (It should be about 150 ohms +  
10 %.)  
Replace the RF  
motor.  
The PG motor  
The backlash value is Check whether the carriage guide shaft Loosen the 2 screws  
does not operate.  
incorrect.  
rotates smoothly when rotated  
manually.  
securing the PG  
motor to the left side  
frame. Then adjust  
the backlash  
between the PG  
motor pinion gear  
and the carriage  
guide shaft gear, as  
described in Chapter  
4, Adjustments.  
Replace the PG  
encoder sensor.  
Replace the PG  
motor or clean the  
encoder plate.  
The PG encoder  
sensor is defective  
The encoder plate is  
defective.  
Check the output signal of the PG  
encoder sensor. (Refer to Table 5-6.)  
Check whether the encoder plate is  
broken or stained.  
The PG home sensor Check the continuity of the sensor.  
Replace the PG  
home sensor (micro  
switch type).  
is defective  
(Check the status of the two micro  
switches.),  
The PG motor is  
defective.  
Check the coil resistance of the PG  
motor. (It should be about 250 ohms +  
18 ohms.)  
Replace the PG  
motor.  
Printing continues The front, rear, or top  
Check the PE sensor.  
Replace the PE  
sensor.  
past the end of  
the paper.  
PE sensor is  
defective.  
When paper jams, The paper jam sensor Check the paper jam sensor.  
Replace the paper  
jam sensor.  
the printer does  
not beep.  
is defective.  
Ribbon Jam error  
occurs even the  
ribbon is fed  
correctly.  
Ribbon jam sensor is  
defective.  
Check the ribbon jam sensor.  
Replace the ribbon  
jam sensor.  
5-25  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Symptom  
Printing occurs  
outside the paper  
width.  
Table 5-7. Printer Mechanism Repair 4/4  
Cause Checkpoint  
Check the PW sensor.  
Solution  
Replace the PW  
sensor.  
The PW sensor is  
defective.  
The paper bail  
assembly does  
not work.  
The plunger is  
defective.  
Check the coil resistance of the  
plunger. (It should be about 9 ohms.)  
Replace the plunger.  
Continuous paper The tension value of  
The distance between the frame and  
Perform the tractor  
wire spring tension  
adjustment, as  
described in Section  
4.1.3.  
becomes  
the tractor wire spring the seal securing the white line should  
crumpled at the  
front or rear  
is incorrect.  
be about 3 mm (0.12 inches).  
tractor assembly.  
The tractor select  
(front or rear)  
function is not  
working.  
The tractor select  
sensor is defective.  
Check the continuity of the tractor  
select sensor.  
Replace the tractor  
select sensor.  
The tractor select  
gear is disconnected  
from the tractor select  
cam.  
Visually check the tractor select gear  
holder.  
Join the tip of the  
tractor select lever to  
the tractor select  
gear holder.  
5-26  
Rev. B  
CHAPTER 6  
MAINTENENCE  
6.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENENCE..............................................................................6-1  
6.2 LUBRICATION AND ADHESIVE APPLICATION...................................................6-1  
MAINTENANCE  
6.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
To keep the printer in good condition, regularly clean the case exterior (using denatured alcohol) and vacuum  
the mechanism's interior to remove dust and paper debris. After cleaning the printer, check that it is  
adequately lubricated, as described in Section 6.2, below. Before returning the printer to the customer,  
inspect the springs and paper feed rollers and check that the printer operates properly.  
CAUTION  
;Disconnect the printer from the external AC power source before performing maintenance. Do not  
use thinner, trichloroethylene, or ketone-based solvents on the plastic components of the printer.  
Note: It is necessary to clean the carriage encoder belt periodically. When this printer is returned  
for service, clean the surface of carriage encoder belt.  
6.2 LUBRICATION AND ADHESIVE APPLICATION  
EPSON recommends that the printer be lubricated at the points illustrated in Figures 6-2, 6-3, and 6-4 using  
EPSON lubricants O2 and G26. These lubricants have been extensively tested and found to comply with  
needs of the printer. Refer to Table 6-1 for information on lubricants O2 and G26. Table 6-2 lists the  
appropriate lubricant for each point. Make sure the parts to be lubricated are clean before applying lubricant.  
Also avoid applying too much lubricant because it may damage related parts.  
Adhesive application is necessary at the points indicated in Table 6-3 when parts are disassembled or  
replaced. EPSON recommends Neji Lock #2 (G) adhesive be applied to the points indicated in Figures 6-2,  
6-3, and 6-4. Avoid allowing excess adhesive to overflow onto related parts.  
Table 6-1. Recommended Lubricants  
Type  
Grease  
Oil  
Name  
G26  
O2  
Quantity  
40 g  
40 cc  
Part No.  
Availability  
B702600001  
B710200001  
B730200200  
E
E
E
Adhesive  
Neji Lock #2 (G)  
1000 g  
Note: E = EPSON exclusive product (not commercially available)  
CAUTION  
;Do not apply too much lubricant because it may create stains or cause the mechanism to  
malfunction.  
6-1  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Table 6-2. Lubrication Points  
Lubrication Point  
Carriage oil pad ring (on both left and right sides of carriage)  
Carriage oil pad (under the carriage head cable holder),  
Ref. No.  
(1)  
(2)  
Ref. Figure  
Lubricant  
O2  
O2  
6-3  
6-3  
6-3  
(3)  
Hole holding the tip of the rear carriage guide shaft (in both left G26  
and right side frames  
(4)  
(5)  
6-3  
6-3  
Both edges of the rear carriage guide shaft  
Parallelism adjustment lever (contact point with the rear carriage G26  
guide shaft  
G26  
(6)  
6-4  
Rear carriage shaft holding lever (contact point with the rear G26  
carriage guide shaft)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
6-3  
6-4  
6-4  
6-2  
6-2  
6-2  
6-3  
6-4  
6-3  
6-3  
6-3  
Carriage guide shaft (on the both front and rear shafts)  
Platen roller shaft holder (contact point with the platen roller)  
Paper bail gear  
Shafts of paper feed gears (shafts on the left frame)  
Paper feed gears (gears on the left frame)  
Tension pulley (pulley shaft and hook for the tension pulley spring) G26  
Fulcrum point for the paper bail shaft and plunger  
Platen gap motor pinion  
G26  
G26  
G26  
G26,O2  
G26  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
(13)  
(14)  
(15)  
(16)  
(17)  
G26  
G26  
G26  
G26  
G26  
Carriage guide shaft gear  
Ribbon feed gears  
Tractor select cam  
Table 6-3. Adhesive Application Points  
Ref. No.  
Ref. Figure  
Adhesive Application Point  
Adhesive  
(25)  
6-3  
Tractor tension wire  
Neji Lock #2 (G)  
Figure 6-1. Correct Adhesive Application  
6-2  
Rev. B  
MAINTENANCE  
Figure 6-2. Lubrication and Adhesive Diagram 1  
6-3  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Figure 6-3. Lubrication and Adhesive Diagram 2  
6-4  
Rev. B  
MAINTENANCE  
Figure 6-4. Lubrication and Adhesive Diagram 3  
6-5  
Rev. B  
APPENDIX  
A.1 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS..................................................................... A-1  
A.2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS ........................................................................................... A-9  
A.3 COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................................................... A-21  
A.4 CONNECTOR JUNCTION BOARD CONNECTORS.......................................... A-27  
A.5 PART LIST.......................................................................................................... A-28  
A.6 EXPLODED DIAGRAMS .................................................................................... A-31  
APPENDIX  
A.1 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS  
Figure A-1 illustrates the interconnection of the primary components. Table A-1 summarize the description  
and sizes of the connectors.  
Fan  
CN3(20)  
C204 DRV-B  
CN5(2)  
CN2(8)  
C204 PSB/PSE  
EIA-232D  
AC Input  
IEEE1284  
CN12(36)  
CN2(20)  
CN13(7)  
Cover Open Sensor  
Printer Mechanism  
CR Encoder  
TYPE-B  
CN11(36)  
Printhead  
C204 MAIN  
CN8(8)  
CN6(6)  
Junction Board  
CN15(6)  
CN1(6)  
CN2(7)  
C204 SUB  
Paper Cutter  
Unit  
CN7(12) CN14(50x2) CN16(7)  
C204 DRV  
CN1(50x2)  
CN1(7)  
CN2(7)  
C204 PNL  
Figure A-1. Cable Connection  
A-1  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Table A-1. Board Connector Summary  
Connection Pin Number Table to Refer  
C204 MAIN Board  
Connector  
CN1  
30 pins  
20 pins  
2 pins  
Table A-2  
=> Mechanism (Print head)  
=> C204 DRV-B board  
=> Cover Open  
CN2  
Table A-3  
CN3  
Table A-4  
CN4  
4 pins  
Table A-5  
=> Mechanism (Carriage encoder)  
=> Panel unit  
CN5  
14 pins  
6 pins  
12 pins  
8 pins  
Table A-6  
CN6  
Table A-7  
=> C204 PSB/PSE board  
=> C204 PSB/PSE board  
=> C204 DRV-B board  
=> Optional paper cutter  
=> C204 PSB/PSE board  
=> Optional Type-B I/F card  
=> IEEE-1284 I/F  
CN7  
Table A-8  
CN8  
Table A-9  
CN9  
7 pins  
Table A-10  
Table A-11  
Table A-12  
Tables 1-10 an 1-11  
Table 1-12  
CN10  
CN11  
CN12  
CN13  
CN14  
CN15  
CN16  
8 pins  
36 pins  
36 pins  
7 pins  
=> EIA 232D I/F  
50 pins X 2 Table A-13  
=> C204 DRV board  
=> C204 SUB board  
=> C204 SUB board  
6 pins  
7 pins  
Table A-14  
Table A-15  
C204 DRV Board  
CN1  
CN2  
CN3  
50 pins X 2 Table A-13  
=> C204 MAIN board  
=> Printer mechanism  
=> C204 PSB/PSE board  
50 pins  
6 pins  
Table A-16  
Table A-17  
C204 DRV-B Board  
CN1  
CN2  
CN3  
30 pins  
6 pins  
Table A-18  
Table A-9  
Table A-3  
=> Mechanism (Printhead)  
=> C204 MAIN board  
=> C204 MAIN board  
20 pins  
C204 PSB/PSE board  
CN1  
CN2  
CN3  
3 pins  
6 pins  
Table A-19  
=> AC inlet  
=> C204 MAIN board  
=> C204 MAIN (CN7) and C204 DRV  
(CN3) boards  
Table A-7  
12 pins  
Tables A-8 and A-17  
CN4  
CN5  
=> C204 MAIN board  
8 pins  
2 pins  
Table A-11  
Table A-20  
=> Cooling fan motor  
A-2  
Rev. B  
APPENDIX  
Table A-2. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN1  
Signal Name  
Pin  
I/O  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
Function  
Printhead pin #10  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P+10  
P-10  
P+12  
P-12  
P+16  
P-16  
P-17  
P-9  
P+17  
P-11  
P+11  
P-7  
P+9  
P-7  
P+2  
P+1  
HFANB  
P-1  
FTMP  
P-2  
FANCOM  
HTMP  
HFANA  
PWIDTH  
+5  
GND  
Printhead pin #12  
GND  
Printhead pin #16  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Printhead pin #17  
GND  
Printhead pin #11  
GND  
Printhead pin #9  
GND  
Printhead pin #2  
Printhead pin #1  
HF motor phase B  
GND  
HF motor temperature  
GND  
HF motor common  
Print head temperature  
HF motor phase A  
Paper width signal  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
25  
29  
30  
O
O
I
O
I
-
23, 24,, 26, 27, 28 GND  
-
Table A-3. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN2  
Signal Name  
Pin  
I/O  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
Function  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HR3P  
HR2P  
HR9N  
HR2N  
HR7P  
HR7N  
HR9P  
HR3N  
HL8P  
HL3N  
HL8P  
HL2N  
HL8N  
HL7N  
HL3P  
HL2P  
HR4P  
HR4N  
Print head coil #6 drive signal  
Print head coil #4 drive signal  
Print head coil #18 drive signal  
Print head coil #4 drive signal  
Print head coil #14 drive signal  
Print head coil #14 drive signal  
Print head coil #18 drive signal  
Print head coil #6 drive signal  
Print head coil #15 drive signal  
Print head coil #5 drive signal  
Print head coil #13 drive signal  
Print head coil #3 drive signal  
Print head coil #15 drive signal  
Print head coil #13 drive signal  
Print head coil #5 drive signal  
Print head coil #3 drive signal  
Print head coil #8 drive signal  
Print head coil #8 drive signal  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
167  
18  
19  
20  
HRSENS  
HNSENS  
Print head coil shortage monitoring  
Print head coil shortage monitoring  
I
Table A-4. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN3  
Pin  
1
2
Signal Name  
COPEN  
I/O  
I
-
Function  
Cover open status  
-
GND  
A-3  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Table A-5. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN4  
Pin  
1
2
3
4
Signal Name  
GND  
I/O  
Function  
-
-
I
I
+5V  
ENCB  
ENCA  
CR encoder B phase pulse  
CR encoder A phase pulse  
Table A-6. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN5  
Pin  
1
2
3
5
Signal Name  
LED_DATA  
LED_XLE  
LED_CLK  
LED_XOE  
BUZZER  
VCC  
I/O  
O
O
O
O
O
-
Function  
LED data  
LED data latch  
LED data clock  
LED light enable  
Buzzer  
6
7
+5 VDC  
9
9
11  
13  
SW_INH  
SW_S/XL  
SW_DATA  
SW_CLK  
GND  
O
O
I
O
-
Switch data transfer inhibit  
Switch data shift/load select  
Switch data  
Switch data clock  
4, 10, 912, 14  
Table A-7. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN6  
Pin  
1, 2, 3  
4, 5, 6  
Signal Name  
VP1  
I/O  
-
-
Function  
+37 VDC  
GND for VP1  
GP1  
Table A-8. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN7  
Pin  
1, 2, 3  
4, 5, 6  
Signal Name  
VP2  
I/O  
-
-
Function  
+37 VDC  
GND for VP2  
GP2  
Table A-9. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN8  
Pin  
8, 7, 6  
5, 4, 3  
1
Signal Name  
VP1  
I/O  
Function  
+37 VDC  
GND for VP1  
-
-
-
-
GP1  
VX  
GND  
+5 VDC switched by reset status  
2
Table A-10. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN9  
Pin  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Signal Name  
CUTON  
CUTDIR  
CUTTER  
CUTHPI  
+5V  
I/O  
O
I
I
I
-
-
I
Function  
Cut signal  
Cut direction  
Paper cutter mount/dismount  
Cutter home position  
GND  
RF  
Reverse point signal  
Table A-11. Digital Board Connector CN10  
Pin  
1, 2  
3, 4  
5
6
7
Signal Name  
+5V  
I/O  
I
O
O
O
I
Function  
GND  
DRERR  
/PD  
Head driver error signal  
Power down signal  
Current limit signal  
CL  
8
SD  
I
Power shutdown signal  
A-4  
Rev. B  
APPENDIX  
Table A-12. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN11  
Pin  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
Signal Name  
+5  
I/O  
-
Function  
7
8
9
10  
BTXD  
XREADY  
BRXD  
NC  
O
O
I
Transmit data  
Ready  
Receive data  
-
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
BXRST  
INH  
O
O
I
I
I
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Reset signal  
Inhibit signal output  
Command request signal  
Write ready signal  
Read request signal  
Write signal  
XCMDREQ  
XWRRDY  
XRDREQ  
XWR  
XRD  
XCS  
GND  
A3  
Read signal  
Chip select signal  
19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
Address bus 3  
Address bus 2  
Address bus 1  
Address bus 0  
Data bus 7  
Data bus 6  
Data bus 5  
Data bus 4  
Data bus 3  
A2  
A1  
A0  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Data bus 2  
Data bus 1  
Data bus 0  
A-5  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Table A-13. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN14  
Pin  
1
Signal Name  
VP3  
I/O  
-
Function  
+37 VDC  
2, 3, 4  
5, 6, 7, 8  
9, 10  
11  
GND  
+5  
VX  
FAN  
PLN  
RFH/R  
RFC  
RFA  
PGD  
PGB  
CRINS  
-
-
-
+5 VDC switched by reset status  
HF control signal  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
Plunger N channel  
RF motor common  
RF motor C phase pulse  
RF motor A phase pulse  
PG motor D phase pulse  
PG motor B phase pulse  
CR motor insulation resistance  
monitoring  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26, 27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
CRI1  
CRCLM  
CRD  
CRB  
PFH/R  
PFC  
O
I
CR motor current limit signal 1  
CR motor current limit signal  
CR motor bridge D signal  
CR motor bridge B signal  
PF motor common  
O
O
O
O
O
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
PF motor C phase pulse  
PF motor A phase pulse  
PFA  
GND  
TR_SEL  
P_TRCT  
P_JAM  
F_PE  
R_PE  
T_PE  
PGENCB  
PGENCA  
PGHOME  
RBJAM  
PLP  
RFD  
RFB  
PGH/R  
PGC  
PGA  
Tractor select signal  
Pull tractor mount/dismount  
Paper jam detection  
Front paper end  
Rear paper end  
Top paper end  
PG encoder B signal  
PG encoder A signal  
PG home position  
Ribbon jam  
Plunger P channel  
RF motor bridge D signal  
RF motor bridge B signal  
PG motor common  
PG motor C phase pulse  
PG motor A phase pulse  
CR motor current limit signal 2  
CR motor current limit signal 0  
Clock pulse for CR motor driver  
CR motor bridge C signal  
CR motor bridge A signal  
PF motor bridge D signal  
PF motor bridge B signal  
CRI2  
CRI0  
CRCLK  
CRC  
CRA  
PFD  
PFB  
Table A-14. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN15  
Pin  
1
2
3
4
Signal Name  
DIP1  
I/O  
I
I
I
I
Function  
DIP SW1 status  
DIP SW2 status  
DIP SW3 status  
DIP SW4 status  
DIP SW5 status  
DIP SW select port 1  
DIP2  
DIP3  
DIP4  
DIP5  
5
6
I
O
DIPCNT1  
A-6  
Rev. B  
APPENDIX  
Table A-15. C204 MAIN Board Connector CN16  
Pin  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Signal Name  
DIPCNT2  
DIPCNT3  
DIPCNT4  
DIPCNT5  
DIPCNT6  
DIPCNT7  
DIPCNT8  
I/O  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Function  
DIP SW select port 2  
DIP SW select port 3  
DIP SW select port 4  
DIP SW select port 5  
DIP SW select port 6  
DIP SW select port 7  
DIP SW select port 8  
Table A-16. C204 DRV Board Connector CN2  
Pin  
1, 3, 5, 8  
2
Signal Name  
VP3  
I/O  
Function  
+37 VDC  
-
-
-
+5V  
K
4
GND  
6
7
RBJAM  
NC  
Ribbon jam  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
INTLOC  
FANDRV  
INTLOC  
INTLOC  
GND  
-
GND  
CR fan drive  
GND  
-
-
-
-
GND  
GP3  
GND for VP3  
15  
16  
TR_SEL  
PGHOME  
RFD  
RFCOM  
RFB  
RFA  
PGCOM  
RFC  
Tractor select signal  
PG home position  
RF motor phase D  
RF motor common  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
RF motor phase A  
PG motor common  
RF motor phase C  
PG motor phase A  
PG motor phase D  
PG motor phase C  
PG motor phase B  
PG encoder phase B  
PG encoder phase A  
Rear PE sensor  
PGA  
PGD  
PGC  
PGB  
PENCB  
PENCA  
R_PE  
T_PE  
+5V  
F_PE  
P_TRCT  
P_JAM  
PLGP  
GND  
Top PE sensor  
-
-
PE sensor front  
Pull tractor  
Paper jam sensor  
Plunger  
37  
38  
39  
40  
CRB  
PLGN  
CRB  
PFA  
CRB  
PFB  
CRA  
PFC  
CRA  
CR motor phase B  
Plunger  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
CR motor phase B  
PF motor phase A  
CR motor phase B  
PF motor phase B  
CR motor phase A  
PF motor phase C  
CR motor phase A  
PF motor phase D  
CR motor phase A  
PF motor common  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48, 49, 50  
PFD  
CRA  
PFCOM  
A-7  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Table A-17. C204 DRV Board Connector CN3  
Pin  
1, 2, 3  
4, 5, 6  
Signal Name4  
VP3  
I/O  
-
I
Function  
+37 VDC  
GND for VP3  
GP3  
Table A-18. C204 DRV-B Board Connector CN1  
Pin  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal Name4  
P+6  
I/O  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
Function  
Printhead pin #6  
Printhead pin #4  
GND  
GND  
Printhead pin #14  
GND  
Printhead pin #18  
GMD  
Printhead pin #15  
GND  
Printhead pin #13  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Printhead pin #5  
Printhead pin #3  
Printhead pin #8  
GND  
P+4  
P-18  
P-4  
P+14  
P-14  
P+18  
P-6  
P+15  
P-5  
P+13  
P-3  
P-15  
P-13  
P+5  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19, 20  
P+3  
P+8  
P-8  
NC  
Table A-19. C204 PSB/PSE Board Connector CN1  
Pin  
1
2
Signal Name4  
I/O  
Function  
AC input  
L
NC  
N
I
-
I
3
AC input  
Table A-20. C204 PSB/PSE Board Connector CN5  
Pin  
1
Signal Name4  
VP3  
I/O  
O
Function  
2
/FANDR  
O
Fan motor drive  
A-8  
Rev. B  
APPENDIX  
A.2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS  
See the following pages for the figures below:  
Figure A-2. C204 MAIN Board Exploded Diagram  
C204 MAIN  
Figure A-3. C204 DRV Board Exploded Diagram  
C204 DRV  
Figure A-4. C204 DRV-B Board Exploded Diagram  
C204 DRV-B  
Figure A-5. C204 PSB Board Exploded Diagram  
C204 PSB  
Figure A-6. C204 PSE Board Exploded Diagram  
C204 PSE  
A-9  
Rev. B  
APPENDIX  
A.3 Component Layout  
Figure A- 7. C204 MAIN Board Component Layout (1)  
A-21  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Figure A- 8. C204 MAIN Board Component Layout (2)  
A-22  
Rev. B  
APPENDIX  
Figure A- 9. C204 DRV Board Component Layout (1)  
Figure A- 10. C204 DRV Board Component Layout (2)  
A-23  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Figure A- 11. C204 DRV-B Board Component Layout (1)  
Figure A- 12. C204 DRV-B Board Component Layout (2)  
A-24  
Rev. B  
APPENDIX  
Figure A- 13. C204 PSB Board Component Layout  
A-25  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Figure A- 14. C204 PSE Board Component Layout  
A-26  
Rev. B  
APPENDIX  
A.4 Connectors on the Connector Junction Board  
See the figure bellow for the connector arrangement on the connector junction board.  
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
C
o
B
R
W
G
Y
:
:
B
Y
l
e
a
c
l
k
:
R
e
d
:
W
h
i
t
e
:
G
r
a
y
l
o
w
B
R
G
W
B
R
W
B
W
Y
W
2
p
2
i
n
p
s
4
i
n
p
s
3
i
n
p
s
3
i
n
p
s
i
n
s
4
3
p
p
i
6
i
n
n
s
p
s
i
n
s
2
6
p
p
i
i
n
n
s
s
2
p
i
n
s
t
o
R
i
b
b
o
n
J
a
m
t
o
I
n
t
e
r
l
o
c
k
t
o
C
R
M
o
t
o
r
t
o
F
a
n
B
6
p
i
W
2
p
i
2
p
i
n
s
R
n
s
W
n
s
t
o
O
p
t
i
o
n
C
u
t
t
o
P
a
p
e
r
F
e
e
d
M
o
t
o
r
t
o
C
R
M
o
t
o
r
F
a
n
Figure A- 15. Connectors on the Connector Junction Board  
A-27  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
A.5 Part List  
Table A-20. Part List (1/3)  
No.  
Part Names  
No.  
Part Names  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
152  
153  
159  
160  
161  
162  
HOUSING ASSY.,LOWER  
FRAME ASSY.,BOTTOM  
COVER ASSY.,FRONT  
HOUSING ASSY.,UPPER  
HOUSING ASSY.,TOP  
LOGO PLATE  
COVER,PAPER SUPPORT  
CAP,LOWER  
COVER,REAR  
CAP,MAGNET  
HOUSING SUB ASSY.,TOP  
COVER,I/F  
MAGNET SUB ASSY.,TOP  
MECHANISM MOUNTING SCREW  
TOP COVER HINGE SCREW  
HOLDER,CONTROL PANEL  
HOUSING,LEFT  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
SPACER,PS UNIT  
LEAF SPRING,BASE FRAME  
COVER, DIP SWITCH  
COVER,CONNECTOR,UPPER ECW  
C.B.(O)SCREW M3X8 F/ZN  
CONNECTOR LOCK NUT for USA  
CONNECTOR LOCK NUT for others  
DETECTOR,INTER LOCK 2.5,30  
BOARD ASSY.,SUB  
GROUNDING PLATE,MECHANISM  
PLATE  
SHIELD PALTE,DRV-B  
SHIELD PLATE,DRV  
GRONDING PLATE,BLACKET  
MOUNT,DIP SWITCH  
BOARD ASSY.,MAIN  
SCREW for USA  
SCREW for EUR, S.E.ASIA, ACEANIA  
GUIDE,I/F BOARD  
BRACKET,I/F  
SHIELD PLATE,MAIN  
EARTH SPRING;B  
HARNESS  
C.B.S. SCREW M3X6  
PRINTER MECHANISM,M-3I60  
FRAME ASSY.,LEFT  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
200  
201  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
212  
500  
501  
502  
503  
504  
505  
506  
507  
508  
509  
510  
511  
512  
513  
514  
515  
516  
517  
518  
519  
HOUSING,RIGHT  
COVER,TOP,SUB ASSY.  
COVER,PUSH TRACTOR SUB ASSY.  
PAPER SUPPORT SUB ASSY.  
MOUNT,INTERLOCK  
SHIELD PLATE  
C.B.S.(O) SCREW M3X8  
C.B.(O) SCREW M4X6  
C.P. SCREW WITH S/WM3X16  
C.F.S.SCREW M3X10  
C.B.B. SCREW M3X8  
FRAME ASSY.,RIGHT  
SOLENOID ASSY.,LD  
MOTOR ASSY.,PG  
MOTOR ASSY.,CR  
FRAME,LOWER  
FRAME,FRONT  
C.B.S. SCREW M3X8  
C.B.SCREW M3X12  
C.B.B. SCREW M3X10  
C.B.B. SCREW M3X12  
C.B.B.SCREW M4X10  
C.B.B. SCREW M4X16  
C.P.(PS) SCREW M4X8  
C.B.S.(O) SCREW M4X8  
C.B.S.SCREW, 4X14 F/ZN  
C.B.S. SCREW M3X6  
C.B.B. SCREW M3X10  
C.F.B. SCREW M3X10  
C.B.S. SCREW M3X4  
METAL,TRANSPORT,FIX,LEFT  
TRANSPORT LOCKING BRACKET  
FERRITE CORE RISC-4  
FERRITE CORE  
MOTOR ASSY.,PF DC4.34  
PULLY ASSY.,BELT  
TENSION PULLEY ASSEMBLY  
FRAME ASSY.,MOTOR RF  
TRACTOR SELECT DETECTOR  
MOTOR ASSY.,RF  
RIBBON FEED SELECT GEAR  
TRACTOR SELECT LEVER UPPER  
TRACTOR SELECT LEVER LOWER  
TRACTOR SELECT LEVER SPRING  
TRACTOR SELECT CAM  
TRACTOR SELECT TRANSMISSION  
GEAR  
RIBBON FEED TRANSMISSION GEAR  
PAPER THICKNESS DETECTOR  
DETECTOR ASSY.,PGHP  
DETECTOR ASSY.,PULL TRACTOR  
PAPER GUIDE,UPPER  
CARRIAGE ASSY.  
FERRITE CORE RISC-8  
C.B.S.(O) SCREW M3X6  
+.ONEWAY PLA- LOCK,3X12,F/ZN  
DAMPER SHEET  
520  
521  
522  
523  
524  
525  
526  
527  
528  
DAMPER SHEET;B  
SHAFT,FRONT,LOWER,RIGHT ECW  
SHAFT,FRONT,LOWER,LEFT  
LEVER ASSY.,LOCK,LEFT  
LEVER ASSY.,LOCK RIGHT  
LEAD WIRE  
BELT PULLEY HOLDER  
PLATEN ASSY.  
A-28  
Rev. B  
APPENDIX  
Table A-20. Part List (2/3)  
NO.  
529  
Part Names  
BOARD ASSY.,INTERMIT,HEAD  
NO.  
587  
Part Names  
ROLLER TRANSMISSION  
PLATEN  
GEAR  
530  
531  
532  
533  
534  
535  
536  
537  
538  
539  
540  
541  
543  
544  
545  
546  
547  
548  
549  
550  
551  
552  
553  
554  
555  
556  
557  
558  
559  
561  
562  
563  
564  
565  
BOARD ASSY.,INTERMIT,CARRIAGE  
BOARD ASSY.,DETECTOR,PTS  
PAPER ASSY.,SUPPORT  
ROLLER ASSY.,LOAD  
BLUSH,ELIMINATION ELECTLIC  
DETECTOR ASSY.,PE,UPPER  
DETECTOR ASSY.,PW  
HARNES,CUTTER  
HODLER,CR MOTOR  
MOUNT PLATE,CR MOTOR  
CABLE,BOARD,INTERMIT,HEAD  
FAN  
588  
589  
590  
591  
592  
593  
595  
596  
597  
598  
599  
600  
601  
602  
603  
604  
605  
606  
607  
608  
610  
611  
612  
613  
614  
615  
616  
617  
618  
619  
620  
621  
622  
PLATEN ROLLER MIDDLE GEAR  
TENSION ROLLER GEAR  
PAPER BAIL GEAR  
PAPER BAIL LEVER  
CUP SCREW M3X30  
TIMING BELT,PF  
PAPER FEED REDUCTION GEAR  
PAPER FEED MIDDLE GEAR  
TRACTOR SELECT GEAR HOLDER  
TENSION PULLEY SPRING  
RIBBON FEED TRANSMISSION GEAR  
PLAIN WASHER 3X0.2X9  
PLAIN WASHER 4X0.8X10  
C.P.S.P.SCREW M3X6 F/ZN  
C.P.(C).(S) SCREW M4X10  
C.P.S.(P) SCREW M3X6  
C.P.(PS) SCREW M4X6  
C.P.(S) SCREW M2.6X5 F/ZN  
MINI CLAMPYMC-05-H-0  
C.P.(PS) SCREW M4X8  
C.P.S.P.SCREW M2.5X6  
PLAIN WASHER 4X0.2X6  
C.B.S.(O) SCREW M4X8  
PLANE WASHER 4.1X0.2X7.8  
RETAINING RING TYPE-E  
LEAF SPRING4.1X0.13X8.3  
H.N.F. M4  
WIRE,TRACTOR  
DETECTOR PLATE,PTS  
WIRE BAND  
RESISTOR  
TRACTOR SUB ASSY.,LEFT,FRONT  
TRACTOR,RIGHT,FRONT  
PAPER SUPPORT  
SHAFT,TRACTOR  
TRACTOR GUIDE SHAFT  
FRAME ASSY.,PF  
TRACTOR SUB ASSY.,LEFT,REAR  
TRACTOR,RIGHT,REAR  
SPACER,PF ROLLER  
ROLLER,PF,DRIVE  
SPUR GEAR 18.4  
SHAFT,CR,GUIDE,REAR  
SHAFT,CR,GUIDE,FRONT  
LEVER,SHAFT,LEFT  
LEVER,SHAFT,RIGHT  
GUIDE SHAFT HOLDING SPRING  
LEVER,GAP,ADJUST  
FLANGE NUT  
C.P.S.(P.S) SCREW M3X8  
RETAINING RING TYPE-E  
C.B.S SCREW 4X8  
LEAF SPRING 8.2X0.15X15  
PLAIN WASHER 8X0.5X15  
WIRE HOLDER  
PAPER GAP ADJUSTMENT MIDDLE 623  
GEAR  
566  
567  
568  
569  
570  
571  
572  
573  
574  
575  
576  
577  
579  
580  
581  
582  
584  
585  
586  
DUCT,FAN  
COVER,CONNECTOR  
DAMPER,LEFT  
DAMPER,RIGHT  
DAMPER,LOWER  
624  
625  
626  
627  
628  
629  
630  
632  
633  
634  
635  
637  
638  
639  
640  
641  
644  
645  
646  
HEXAGON NUT M2  
RIBBON FEED DRIVE GEAR  
RIBBON FEED GEAR COVER  
CABLE CLIP  
ROCKING WIRE SADDLE  
C.P.(PS).SCREW M4X8  
C.P.S.SCREW M2X10  
C.P.S.(O) SCREW M3X6  
C.P.S(P.S) SCREW,3X10,F/ZN  
METAL FITTINGS,FASTEN,SHAFT  
C.P.O SCREW M4X5  
PLAIN WASHER 2.5X0.5X7.5  
SHEET,DUST PROOF  
C.B.S. SCREW M3X6  
C.B.S. SCREW M3X8  
C.B.S.SCREW M4X6  
OIL PAD COVER  
OIL PAD RING  
FLAME,CABLE,HEAD  
COVER,HEAD CABLE  
SHAFT,FASTEN,HOLDER  
TIMING BELT,CR  
HOLDER,BELT FASTEN  
FRAME,PAPER GUIDE MOUNT  
EXTENSION SPRING,1000  
PAPER GUIDE,LOWER  
SHEET,HEAD CABLE,PROTECT  
PLATEN ROLLER GEAR  
PLATEN ROLLER SHAFT HOLDER  
PLATEN ROLLER REDUCTION GEAR  
PLASTI RIVET  
HOLDER,PLATEN,RIGHT  
HOLDER,PLATEN,LEFT  
A-29  
Rev. B  
DFX-8500  
Table A-20. Part List (3/3)  
NO.  
Part Names  
NO.  
Part Names  
647  
648  
649  
650  
651  
652  
653  
654  
655  
SPUR,GEAR,40  
669  
671  
672  
673  
674  
675  
676  
801  
901  
FAN,CR  
RIBON MASK SUB ASSY.  
SPUR,GEAR,24  
MOUNT PLATE,DETECTOR,RJ  
DETECTOR ASSY.,RJ0V,0A,  
HARNESS,FAN  
PAPER GUIDE ASSY.,PJ DETECTOR  
INDIVIDUAL CARTON FOR AMERICA  
EXTENSION SPRING,320  
MOUNT PLATE WIRE,RIGHT  
MOUNT PLATE,WIRE,LEFT  
EXTENSION SPRING,40  
SPUR GEAR,32  
C.P.S SCREW,2X14,F/ZN  
HEXAGON NUT A  
HEXAGON NUT,B  
INDIVIDUAL  
EUROPE  
CARTON  
BOX  
FOR  
656  
LEVER,TENSION,CANCEL  
1001 INDIVIDUAL  
PACIFIC  
CARTON  
BOX  
FOR  
657  
658  
660  
661  
662  
663  
664  
665  
666  
667  
668  
BUSH,8  
BUSH,12  
RESISTOR 0OHM,  
1102 OUTER CARTON BOX  
1203 PAD,PRINTER,UPPER  
1304 SHEET,PRINTER  
1405 PAD,PRINTER,UNDER  
1506 SHEET A  
1607 SHEET B  
1708 JOINT  
1809 JOINTHP-601  
C.B.S.(O) SCREW M4X8  
MOUNTING PLATE,FAN,CR  
DOUBLE SIDE TAPE,20X10  
SHAFT,FASTEN,DAMPER,LEFT  
CABLE,SHIELD  
BOARD ASSY.,INTERMIT,MECHANISM  
SHEET,PROTECT,CABLE  
COMPOSITION SCREW,FAN  
1910 CARRIAGE FIXING PLATE  
2011 PAD,PAPER GUIDE  
2118 PLASTIC BAG50X70X  
A-30  
Rev. B  
APPENDIX  
A.6 EXPLODED DIAGRAMS  
See the following pages for the exploded diagrams below. Note that the last page shows the packing  
material for DFX-8500.  
Figure A-16. EXPLODED DIAGRAMS FOR DFX-8500 (1)  
EXPLODED DIAGRAM (1)  
Figure A-17. EXPLODED DIAGRAMS FOR DFX-8500 (2)  
EXPLODED DIAGRAM (2)  
Figure A-18. EXPLODED DIAGRAMS FOR DFX-8500 (3)  
EXPLODED DIAGRAM (3)  
Figure A-19. EXPLODED DIAGRAMS FOR DFX-8500 (4)  
EXPLODED DIAGRAM (4)  
Figure A-20. EXPLODED DIAGRAMS FOR DFX-8500 (5)  
EXPLODED DIAGRAM (5)  
Figure A-21. EXPLODED DIAGRAMS FOR DFX-8500 (6)  
EXPLODED DIAGRAM (6)  
Figure A-22. EXPLODED DIAGRAMS FOR DFX-8500 (7)  
EXPLODED DIAGRAM (7)  
Figure A-23. PACKING MATERIAL FOR DFX-8500  
A-31  
Rev. B  
A
D
8
Rve  
Rve  
A
A-3  
A
D
8
Rve  
Rve  
A
A-3  
A
D
8
Rve  
Rve  
A
A-3  
A
D
8
Rve  
Rve  
A
A-3  
EPSON OVERSEAS MARKETING LOCATIONS  
EPSON AMERICA, Inc.  
EPSON DEUTCHLAND GmBH  
20770 Madrona Avenue,  
P.O. Box 2842  
Zülpicher Straße 6, 4549 Düsseldorf  
Germany  
Torrance, CA 90509-2842  
Phone: (800)922-8911  
Fax: (310)782-5220  
Phone: (0211)56030  
Telex: 8584786  
EPSON UK LTD.  
EPSON FRANCE S.A.  
Campus 100, Maylands Avenue,  
Hemel Hempstead, Herts, HP2 7TJ  
U.K.  
68 bis, rue Marjolin 92300,  
Levallois-Perret  
France  
Phone: (+44)01442-61144  
Fax: (+44)01442-227227  
Phone: (1)4087-3737  
Telex: 610657  
EPSON IBERICA, S.A.  
EPSON ITALIA S.P.A.  
Avda. de Roma, 18-26  
08290 Cerdanyola del Valles  
Balcerona, Spain  
V. le F. lli Casiraghi, 427  
20099 Sesto S. Giovanni MI  
Italy  
Phone: 582.15.00  
Fax: 582.15.55  
Phone: 2-262331  
Fax: 2-2440750  
EPSON AUSTRALIA PTY. LIMITED  
EPSON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.  
1/70 Gibbes Street,  
Chatswood 2067 NSW  
Australia  
No.1 Temasek Avenue #36-00  
Millenia Tower  
Singapore 039192  
Phone: 2-9903-9000  
Fax: 2-9903-9177  
Phone: (065)3377911  
Fax: (065)3341185  
EPSON HONG KONG LTD.  
EPSON TAIWAN TECHNOLOGY &  
TRADING LTD.  
Rooms 4706-10, 47/F  
China Resource Bldg.  
26 Harbour Road, Wanchai, Hong Kong  
Phone: 2585-4300  
10F, No. 287 Nonking E. Road, Sec. 3,  
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.  
Phone: (02)717-7360  
Fax: 2827-7083  
Fax: (02)712-9164  
EPSON PORTUGAL, S.A.  
R. do Progresso, 471, 1° Perafita  
4460 Matosinhos, Portugal  
Phone: (02)996 14 02  
Fax: (02)996 14 11  
SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION  
Imaging & Information Products Division  
80 Harashinden, Hirooka, Shiojiri-Shi, Nagano-Ken 399-07 JAPAN  
Phone: 0263-52-2552  
Fax: 0263-54-4007  
As of September, 1996  
EPSON  
SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION  

Black Decker VEC010BD User Manual
Carrier 48KHA User Manual
Daitsu ASD 129U11 User Manual
Friedrich Air Conditioner SM15 SS12 User Manual
Frigidaire Portable Air Conditioner 2020252A0373 User Manual
Fujitsu Air Conditioner ASVG12LLCA User Manual
GE General Electric Air Conditioner AVE18 User Manual
Grizzly Cargo Carrier H6165 User Manual
Haier HSU 12LE03 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard OFFICEJET 5700J User Manual